CR 25.0 - Service Manual For Download

HEALTHCARE Technical
Global Services Organisation

Documentation
Order No.: DD+DIS071.04E
CR 25.0
*1WRR3W1*
1 Piece WRR3W MA1
Type 5156 / 100
st
1 Edition
To order spare parts and Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 3760
spare part assortments: Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 7388
To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7274
Caution:
This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective safety
regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be

performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

technician.
CE Declaration:
The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed

without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical progress.
AGFA-GEVAERT AG - HE/IMG-GSO / Information & Projects

Tegernseer Landstr. 161 D-81539 München
printed in Germany 08 / 2004

Agfa Company Confidential
OVERVIEW Pictograms and conventions for this documentation
0. Order List This documentation uses certain conventions (pictograms, way of writing) for better
understanding and faster locating of the required information.
1. Controls, Connections and
Set Up Procedure Explanation of the pictograms
2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time
3. Repair and Service

Attention ! Required tools
3.1 Machine specific safety and
repair information
3.2 Machine specific tools, software Removal
tools and auxiliary equipment Info
3.3 Troubleshooting
Installation
3.4 Electrical and mechanical
codes, fuses, LED's Hint
3.5 Replacement of parts Mechanical adjustment
3.6 Adjustments and calibrations Required spare part
3.7 Software menus, settings
Electrical adjustment
3.8 Software-Releases, Patches
3.9 Frequently Asked Questions Required time Calibration
4. Reference and Circuit

Diagrams
5. Spare Parts List
6. Accessories
7. Field Modifications
8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Modifications
Actions Way of writing Sample
9. Maintenance
Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

10. Field Service Bulletins explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

11. Installation Planning "Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
1 2 3
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
12. Glossary and Key Word Index keyboard <Continue>
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 3
07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

DD+DIS071.04E General Information
CR 25.0 Service Documentation

(DD+DIS071.04E)
Information for the Field Service Engineer

The CR 25.0 digitizer is the high-resolution model of the ADC Solo digitizer.
Overview of types:
ADC Solo : Type 5155
CR 25.0: Type 5156
The main differences between ADC Solo and CR 25.0 are:

• increased throughput
• 3 different resolution modes (from 6 pixels/mm up to 20 pixels/mm)
• Mammo capability (after its release)
this is achieved by a modified optic module that provides 50 µm scanning for
mammo.
This is reached by the implementation of a new scan unit in combination with a new
designed software.
In combination with the CR User Station (CRUS) a small footprint of a CR system is

realized
The CRUS will be obtainable as an option in 4th quarter/2004 (its service

documentation will be integrated in CR 25.0 Complete Service Documentation,
DD+DIS071.04E).
Edition 1, Revision 0 CR 25.0 Chapter 0 / I

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5156)
General Information DD+DIS071.04E
Structure of Documentation for Windows NT CR Systems

with ADC QS workstation (Quality System)
ADC
Compact
Digitizer
Type 5145
ADC QS 2.0
Type 4406/421
CR 75.0
Digitizer
Type 5146
or
ADC QS 2.1
Type 4406/421
ADC
Solo
Digitizer
Type 5155
CR 25.0
Digitizer
Type 5156
Chapter 0 / II CR 75.0 Edition 1, Revision 0

(Type 5146) Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS071.04E General Information
Structure of Documentation for UNIX based CR Systems

with VIPS workstation (Viewing and Image Processing Station)
ADC
Compact
Digitizer
Type 5145
ADC Processing
Station
Type 4406/700
CR 75.0
Digitizer
Type 5146 ADC Preview-
and ID Station
Type 4406/841
ADC Software
Installation
Type 4406/...
ADC
Solo
Digitizer
Type 5155
CR 25.0
Digitizer
Type 5156
Edition 1, Revision 0 CR 25.0 Chapter 0 / III

DD+DIS231.05E Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Chapter 1
List of contents
1 Safety ......................................................................... 1
1.1 Intended Use ............................................................................ 1
1.2 General Safety Instructions .................................................... 2
1.3 Safety Instructions for Laser Products ................................. 5
1.4 Safety Regulations .................................................................. 6
2 Preparations before Installation .............................. 7

2.1 Inspection of Packing ............................................................. 7
2.2 Unpacking the Components ................................................... 8
2.3 Checking the Scope of Delivery ............................................. 8
2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets .......................................... 9
3 Controls and Connections ..................................... 10
4 Operation Terminal ................................................. 11
5 Preparations for the Installation ............................ 12

5.1 Preconditions......................................................................... 12
5.2 Required Service Programs.................................................. 12
5.2.1 Configuration via Configuration Viewer............................................. 12
5.2.2 Configuration via CCM-Tool.............................................................. 13
5.2.3 Error Message Program.................................................................... 13
6 Installation of Digitizer............................................ 14
6.1 Electric Connection............................................................... 14
6.1.1 Connecting the Mains Cable ............................................................. 14
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The readers should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document

2005-08-12 (Type 5156 / 100) Agfa Company Confidential
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures DD+DIS231.05E
6.2 Start-up................................................................................... 15
6.2.1 Installation without CRUS..................................................................15
6.2.1.1 Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure ADC Network ............................. 15
6.2.1.2 Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network ...................................................... 16
6.2.2 Installation with CRUS.......................................................................16
6.3 System Integration ................................................................ 17
6.4 Make a Backup of machine-specific Data ........................... 17
7 Concluding the Installation .................................... 18

7.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality ................................ 18
7.1.1 Exposure of a Flatfield.......................................................................18
7.1.2 Evaluation of a Flatfield .....................................................................20
7.2 Last Steps .............................................................................. 20
8 Installation of other ADC Components ................. 21
9 Checklist for Installation / Machine Start-up......... 23


Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5156 / 100) 2005-08-12
The Installation Checklist in section 9 of this chapter gives an overview of all

steps and guides through the complete installation process.
1 Safety
The device must only be operated according to its specifications and its
intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or
intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries
or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA positively will not
assume any liability in these cases.
The device must only be installed and put into operation under the specified
conditions.
1.1 Intended Use

The CR 25.0 must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing
an erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-
ray cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for
the cassettes and a workstation where the resulting digital image information
is further processed and routed.
It is intended that the CR 25.0 is only operated in a radiological environment
by qualified staff.

Edition 1, Revision 8 CR 25.0 Chapter 1 / 1

1.2 General Safety Instructions

• For software and other technical platforms, and/or if valid in combination
with any consumable, which constitute, after installation, a system for the
interpretation of medical image data by trained and qualified
professionals: it is the user's responsibility to ensure that image quality,
display quality, environmental lighting and other possible distractions are
consistent with the clinical application.
• Make sure that the CR 25.0 is constantly monitored in order to avoid
inappropriate handling, especially by children.
• Only trained service personnel must make repairs. Only authorized
service personnel must make changes to the CR 25.0.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing, do not start nor use
the CR 25.0.
• If you want to connect the CR 25.0 with other devices, components or
assemblies and if the technical data do not permit determining whether
the combination with these devices, components or assemblies involves
hazards, you must consult the respective manufacturers to avoid danger
for operating personnel or the environment.
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• As is the case for all technical devices, the CR 25.0 must be operated,
cared for and serviced correctly.
• If you don't operate the CR 25.0 correctly or if you don't have it serviced
correctly, Agfa-Gevaert is not liable for resulting disturbances, damages
or injuries.
• When installing the CR 25.0, care must be taken to ensure that there is
either a mains plug or an all-cable disconnecting device in the internal
installation fitted near the CR 25.0 and that it is easily accessible.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the CR 25.0
immediately.
• Check that the mains voltage is within the specified range of the self
adapting power supply of the machine.

Chapter 1 / 2 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 8

Markings and labels

Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and
outside of the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and
their meaning is given below.
Safety warning, indicating that the CR 25.0 manuals must be consulted

before making any connections to other equipment. The use of accessory
equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
Digitizer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system.
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity

• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has
been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 601-1 and
IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems
standard IEC 601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system
configurator and is responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required contact your local service organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the erasure unit.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the CR 25.0 complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the CR 25.0 and the potential equalization

busbar of the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug
should never be unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.


Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might
exhibit minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade
the quality of communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground):
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the
mains. Do not remove this connection, because this will have a negative
influence on the leakage current.
Power on
Power off:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order
to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is

connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a 120V/60 Hz source.
You can hurt your fingers if they are caught between the ADC Cassette and
the edge of the input slot. At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot.
As soon as the CR 25.0 takes in the cassette, release it.
System configuration responsibility

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be
certified according to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC 950 for data
processing equipment and IEC 601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all
configurations shall comply with the valid version of the system standard IEC
601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible
that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of the
system standard IEC 601-1-1. If in doubt, consult your local service
organization.


1.3 Safety Instructions for Laser Products

The CR 25.0 is a Class 1 Laser Product. It uses a 2x50 mW laser diode,
classification class IIIb.
Under normal operating conditions – when both the front door and the right
side panel are closed – there can be no laser radiation outside the CR 25.0.
It is nonetheless imperative that the local radiation safety regulations
regarding the protection of staff against scattered radiation are complied
with, if the CR 25.0 is located in the immediate vicinity of an X-ray room.
If the front door or the right side panel is opened to solve cassette or image
plate jams the power supply of all critical components is switched off
automatically as a precaution.
Do not open the unit and put in the service key in the interlocks , if any
parts of the laser unit are uncovered.
Observe the Caution instructions on the Optical module label:
WARNING User interventions other than those described in this manual can be
hazardous with regard to laser radiation.


1.4 Safety Regulations

Certificates
The CR 25.0 complies with:
• the general safety regulations :
EN 60601-1:1990 / A1:1993, A2:1995, A13:1996
EN 60601-1-2:2001
IEC 601-1:1988 / A1 :1991, A2 :1995,
IEC 601-1-1 / EN 60601-1-1,
UL 60601-1:2003
CAN / CSA C22.2 No.601.1-M90
• the laser safety regulations :
EN 60825-1:1994 / A1:2002, A2:2001
DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11,
ANSI Z 136-1980.
• EN ISO 14971:2000
EN 1041:1998
EN 980:1996/A1
The Digitizer is in compliance with EG regulation 93/42/EEC Directive

(Medical Device)
Radio Interference Suppression

• It is hereby certified that the Digitizer has interference suppression
according to EN 55011 Class B as well as FCC Rules CR47 Part 15 Class
B (North-America).
Short range devices

• EN 300 330-2 V1.1.1
EN 301 489-03 V1.2.1
Warning
For USA only:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
In case of the equipment will cause harmful interference to other
devices see user manual for help.


2 Preparations before Installation
2.1 Inspection of Packing

The following actions should be taken upon delivery of the system
components, preferably by the customer:
• Completeness check of the shipment by means of the packing list (number
of pallets)
• Comparison of the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and
the shipping papers.
• Checking of the packing material for visible transport damage such as
- dented edges
- damage on the box
- torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws)
In case of damage visible from the outside turn to your local AGFA
representative.
• Checking of the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
Figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the If the machine was subjected to
arrow head in the circle of shocks, the square field in the middle
the TILTWATCH changes of the SHOCKWATCH changes from
from white to red. white to red.


2.2 Unpacking the Components

The following actions must be taken by the forwarder upon delivery of the
system components.
• Remove the outer packing material.
The individual boxes inside must not be opened by the forwarder.
• Take out the accessories or boxes and take out hooks for the ramp.
• Take the machine off the pallet and transport it to the installation site.
• Dispose the packing material.
For unpacking and lifting the machine off the pallet, an area of minimal
200 cm x 350 cm is required. If the available space at the installation site is
limited, the machine can be unpacked beforehand and rolled to the
installation site.
2.3 Checking the Scope of Delivery

The following actions have to be done by the FSE (Field Service Engineer)
at the customer site.
• Check the scope of delivery:
Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list which
specifies the complete scope of delivery.
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 Installation Instructions
1 Installation Report
1 User Manual
1 Reference Manual
1 Certificates
2 Mains Cable (1x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
8 floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy,
1 x Language floppy, 1 x Backup floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)


2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets

Remove all cushioning parts and transport safeguards prior to first operation.
1 2
7 9
5
5155_ 8
reg01
_003.c 6
dr
Figure 2
Cut and remove all cable ties (7 pieces; red) attached to the transport
safeguards 1 - 4 and 7.
1 Swing the metal safeguard 7 Turn the metal bar upwards

forward and remove it. approx. 45° and pull it out.
2 No further measures required. 8 Remove the foam block from the
disk holder.
3 Lift the foam strip and remove it. 9 Swing out the cPCI-rack.
Remove the foam part.
4 Lift the foam strip and remove it.
5 Swing the foam block aside and The foam part is hidden
remove it. behind the cPCI-rack and
can not be seen from
6 Lift and remove the two foam
outside !
wedges


3 Controls and Connections
7 5156_reg01_001.cdr
VDE
UL
Figure 3
1. Line switch Digitizer

2. Port (RS 232 – 25-pin D connector, female D) for the Service PC (behind
the front door)
3. Status indicator
4. Emergency buttons
5. Network connection (unshielded twisted pair)
6. Voltage adaptation switch
7. Mains cable VDE/UL


4 Operation Terminal
Display Functions
The key operator level is intended to

be used by the normal operator. He
uses the system only to produce
diagnostic usable images without the
requirement for special technical skill
or background.
5155_reg01_002.cdr
Figure 4
Key Function Key Function
• Gives an image the status of • Starts erasing images without

emergency when sending it to scanning them
the ADC QS
• Provides access to advanced • Gives access to service level
key-operator functions functions
• Exits the service level
• Quits the current function, exits a • Confirms the keyboarded input
menu without saving • Confirms that you have noticed
modifications non-fatal errors
• Exits from key-operator mode • In "LOCKED" condition, proceeds
and service level with the Digitizer operation
• Moves the cursor one position up • Moves the cursor one position
to previous edit field down to next edit field
• Scrolls upwards or increments • Scrolls downwards or decrements
digits in a numeric entry field digits in a numeric entry field
• Scrolls backwards through • Scrolls backwards through multiple
multiple choices within a field choices within a field
• Moves the entry position in a • Moves the entry position in a
numerical field in descending numerical field in ascending order
order (from right digit to left digit) (from left digit to right digit) or
or toggles between values toggles between values


5 Preparations for the Installation
5.1 Preconditions
The following work has to be performed before the system components are
installed:
• the digitizer is unpacked at its installation site
• finished preinstallation (network connection, electric installations)
• Creation and adaptation of the configuration file adc.cpf, together with the
application specialist.
It is recommended to create and adapt the configuration file adc.cpf, which
is used by all ADC Components, before starting the installation. This
allows a smooth installation.
You have to distinguish between the integration into an independent, pure

ADC Network and the integration into an existing network. When integrating
the digitizer into an existing network, it is necessary to create a CPF-file
beforehand (see chapter 11, Installation Planning, checklist). With a pure
ADC Network the shipment configuration can be used.
5.2 Required Service Programs

The following Software has to be installed on:
• your Service PC or
• the PC of the ID / Preview-Station.
5.2.1 Configuration via Configuration Viewer
The Configuration Viewer is the

ideal tool on ADC QS to change or
modify the configuration of the
system.
It is explained in detail in the
Configuration Viewer Software –
Service Manual of ADC QS.
Figure 5
To transfer the configuration information from the ADC QS to the digitizer at

the end of the configuration session a Digitizer CPF-file (partial CPF-file)
must be created and installed on the digitizer.


5.2.2 Configuration via CCM-Tool

CCM-Tool (Configuration and Customization Management tool)
The CCM-Tool is available on MedNet:
GSO Library/Computed Radiology/ADC System Components/CSO Freeware
The CCM-Tool is needed to create and modify the configuration file (adc.cpf)
for the digitizer.
If there is already a previous version installed on your Service PC, please

remove the complete directory as well as the icons..
Installation: install by executing "setup.exe"
The CCM-Tool will be

installed in directory
"IMOS" or any directory of
your choice.
For detailed information on the installation of the CCM-Tool, see ADC

System Components, Technical Documentation, DD+DIS198.00E,chapter
6.2.
5.2.3 Error Message Program

The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" with the "ERROR.MSG file" translates the
ADC CR25 error codes into clear text.
The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" is a part of IMOS, the "ERROR.MSG file" is
loaded in the Digitizer.


6 Installation of Digitizer
6.1 Electric Connection

The digitizer has a voltage selector at its rear side. Voltage adaptation has to
be checked prior to first operation.
If the voltage adaptation is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the
switch (1, Figure 6) to the right position.
Voltage selector _reg

11_ 0
07 .cdr
5155
Voltage can be 1
adapted to
100 / 120 / 230-240 V.
The default setting is

230-240 V
Figure 6
If the CR 25.0 shall operate at 240 V / 60 Hz use a phase to phase centre

tap wall outlet, otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.
6.1.1 Connecting the Mains Cable

Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:
• USA/Japan: Nema 6-15P; (UL)
• Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A; (VDE)
Mains connection
• Remove the yellow
CHECK POWER
sticker from the mains SELECTION BEFORE
socket of the machine CONNECTING TO MAINS
5155_reg01_004.cdr
only after having

checked the voltage
adjustment.
• Connect the correct
mains cable to the
machine and to the
power supply. Figure 7


6.2 Start-up
The Digitizer must not be connected to a network during the start-up

process.
• Switch on the digitizer.

• Check the operation terminal during the initialization.
While booting for the first time, the message "Installation not yet
confirmed" appears.
Confirm with .
• After a successful start-up "ready" appears.
• Check/adjust date and time in key operator mode.
• Choose terminal language in the service menu "Configure – User
terminal language", available after release of Language File.
• Store the modified machine-specific data.
• Open the service menu "Maintenance – test cycle without scan" and
check the function of cassette- and plate operation with the machine open.
Each size should run at least one time.
• Erase all image plates.
End of the mechanical part of start-up. Proceed with 6.2.1 or 6.2.1.2
6.2.1 Installation without CRUS

6.2.1.1 Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure ADC Network
A pure ADC network consists of:

• 1 digitizer
• ADC QS server station
In this case the ex factory settings for the IP-address (adcs1 192.9.200.199)
can be used.
A new configuration of the machine is not required.
Measures:
• Switch off the digitizer
• Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
• Switch on the digitizer
End of network integration. Proceed with 6.3.


6.2.1.2 Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network
In this case the IP-address has to be adapted to the existing network. This
happens by means of the CPF-file created beforehand.
Measures:
• Load the adapted configuration file ”adc.cpf” (see 5.2.2):
- insert the disk with the CPF-File
- select <Install from floppy>
<CPF-File>
• Choose a name suggested on the LCD
• Store the modified machine-specific data
• Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
The digitizer is now integrated to the network
6.2.2 Installation with CRUS

The CRUS already includes UPS, HUB, isolating transformator and ADC QS
with monitor, keyboard and mouse. It works together with a digitizer as a pure
ADC network.
Measures:
• Connect all components


6.3 System Integration

Precondition
The destinations intended for the digitizer, have to be put into operation and
must be obtainable via Ethernet.
Measures:
• Check whether the ADC QS Server Station is obtainable.
Service menu: "Checks – Check destinations"
• Send a test image to the ADC QS Server Station
Key operator menu “Send test image”
• Check the function of the emergency buttons. As a precondition the
emergency buttons must have been programmed via CPF. Standard CPF
includes entries about the emergency buttons. If a new CPF has been
created, corresponding entries have to be present.
End of system integration
6.4 Make a Backup of machine-specific Data
• Insert an existing backup floppy

or a new formatted floppy
• Start the service program
• Select
<save on floppy>
<Machine specific data>
• Start the backup procedure
• Label the floppy as shown in
Figure 8.
Figure 8


7 Concluding the Installation
7.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality

The hard disk of the digitizer contains two flatfields showing the least
acceptable quality.
For quality evaluation flatfields can be sent to a printer via Service-Menu
<CHECKS>
<SEND FLATFIELD>
<CALIBRATION PATTERN>
<BANDING PATTERN>
Compare the samples with the images created by yourself.
7.1.1 Exposure of a Flatfield

• Expose a gray field (flatfield) and evaluate the image on the Processing
Station and the Laser printer.
Criteria: homogenous field, stripes etc.
• Have a new plate of every format exposed twice as follows:
Rotating
Anode x-ray tube
Cathode
5155_reg01_006.cdr
Figure 9
For exposure place the cassette to match the long axes of cassette and x-
ray tube; see Figure 9.
- 1st exposure: Dose: 10 µGy

12.0 mAs – 75 kV – 1.3 m distance,1.5 mm Cu filter
Please note that these are approximate values that may vary within the x-ray
devices to reach the specified dose of 10 µGy.
- Turn cassette by 180°.

- 2nd exposure: use same parameters as in 1st exposure.
Use a dosimeter to measure the dose!


• Identify the cassette as follows:
Figure 10
- Select in the field Study type: <system diagnosis>

- Select in the field Substudy:<Flat field>
- Confirm the Exposure class: <200>
• Insert the cassette into the Digitizer. Print the image on a printer with a
window setting of 0.6 without changing the level setting on the ADC QS
Server Station.


7.1.2 Evaluation of a Flatfield
Banding Fine white or gray lines in fast-scan direction

Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on banding pattern
If quality is less than “banding pattern test image”: Contact Support center
Calibration / Dark lines or stripes in slow scan direction

Shading Calibration
Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample
If quality is less than “calibration pattern test image”:
Check / adjust the position of the laser beam via the fiber optics
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern:
Make new calibration;
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern: Contact Support center
NOTE: Fine white or gray lines can also appear, if there is dust on the
scanner - use the scan-brush for cleaning the scanner.
7.2 Last Steps

• Dispose of all packing material. (depending on the country, by the
forwarding agent or by the hospital).
• Complete the Installation Report (enclosed to every device) for all system
components and forward it to the regional RSN Manager.
• Fill in the enclosed form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO, if
not done yet.
• Fill in the site entry form (available on MedNet) for entering the data in
SRSS and forward it to your national data coordinator.
• Hand over the ADC System to the application specialist.


8 Installation of other ADC Components
For detailed information on the installation of ADC QS Server station/ client

station or ID-Station, see:
ADC Quality System 2.1.xx, DD+DIS 135.02E, Chapter 1
CR Quality System 3.0, DD+DIS273.04E
ADC System Components, DD+DIS198.00E, Chapter 3.




9 Checklist for Installation / Machine Start-up

No. Step Task Code OK
Before Installation
(1) Confirm installation prerequisites INS
(2) Check consignment of all devices for damage and INS
completeness
Installation and Start-up CRUS + QS
(3) Unpack, check consignment for damage and INS
completeness
(4) Connect power cords, monitor, keyboard, mouse, INS
and optional devices (image disks, UPS, DAT-
Drive)
(5) Position ADC QS respectively CRUS INS
(6) Set in Windows NT: network settings INS
(7) Set in Windows NT: regional settings INS
(8) Set in Windows NT: time and data INS
(9) For ADC QS: Set network settings in WIN NT / INS
settings / control panel
(10) For ADC QS: Open Configuration Viewer / File / INS
Import XML
(11) Check basic functions like receiving, printing INS
sending, viewing images
(12) Reset Infocounters INS
(13) Create a site specific backup INS
(14) Check initialization of all cassettes; if required INS
reinitialize them
Digitizer Installation and Start-up
(15) Remove shipping brackets and install base plate INS
(16) Connect the power cord INS
(17) When first booting: Confirm installation with OK INS
(18) Check date and time in key operator mode INS
(19) Choose terminal language in service menu INS
(20) Make a backup of the machine-specific data INS


No. Step Task Code OK
(21) Check the mechanic components INS

Perform a "Handling Cycle" to check the function
of image plates and cassettes
(22) Erase all image plates INS
(23) Network Integration INS
load the adapted configuration file adc.cpf
select a station name for the digitizer from the
display
make a backup of the machine specific data
connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
(24) System Integration INS
- check whether the ADC QS Server Station is
obtainable:
<Checks> <Check destinations>;
- send a test image to ADC QS Server Station:
"Send test image" in key operator menu
(25) Check the image quality INS
send flatfield to a printer:
<Checks> <Send flatfield>
expose flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED)
print flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED),
compare and evaluate the printouts
(26) Check "Fast Preview" and “Direct ID” option, if

activated
ADC – entire System

(27) Perform system test with medical images INS
(28) Hand over the ADC system to the field application INS
specialist
(29) Fill in the form "Site and System Data" and send it INS
to HE GSO
(30) Send the completed "Installation Reports" to the INS
regional CSO manager
Remote Access
(31) Make connection to Service Host INS


DD+DIS071.04E Functional Description
Chapter 2
List of contents
1 Digitizer as a part of the ADC System..................... 1

1.1 ADC System Components ...................................................... 1
1.2 Standard Work Flow of the ADC System............................... 3
1.3 Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the ADC
System...................................................................................... 4
1.4 Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview .......................... 5
2 ADC Cassettes.......................................................... 6
2.1 Standard Cassette ................................................................... 6
2.2 ADC MD30 Image Plate Principle ........................................... 7
2.3 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassettes .................................... 7
2.4 ADC MD40 Image Plate Principle ........................................... 8
2.5 CR Mammo Cassette............................................................... 9
2.6 Asymmetric Cassette ............................................................ 10
3 Modular Structure of the Digitizer ......................... 11

3.1 Overview of Modules............................................................. 11
3.2 Cassette Unit.......................................................................... 12
3.3 Transport Unit........................................................................ 13
3.4 Scan Unit................................................................................ 14
3.4.1 Laser Diodes....................................................................................15
3.4.2 Polygon............................................................................................15
3.4.3 Photomultiplier (PMT) ......................................................................15
3.4.4 Optic Module Housing......................................................................16
3.5 Erasure Unit ........................................................................... 17
3.6 cPCI-Rack............................................................................... 18
3.6.1 CPU-Ariel.........................................................................................19
3.6.2 Scan Master Board ..........................................................................20
3.6.3 cPCI Power Supply ..........................................................................21
3.6.4 Hard disk..........................................................................................22
3.7 Power Unit.............................................................................. 23
3.7.1 Power Integration Board ..................................................................24

Functional Description DD+DIS071.04E
4 Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer ....................... 25

4.1 Cassette Unit ......................................................................... 25
4.1.1 Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette............................... 25
4.1.2 Identification of the Cassette ........................................................... 25
4.1.3 Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID-Data ....... 26
4.1.4 Opening the Cassette...................................................................... 26
4.2 Transport Unit........................................................................ 27
4.2.1 Sucking the IP ................................................................................. 27
4.2.2 Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit . 27
4.3 Scan Unit................................................................................ 28
4.3.1 Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit............................................ 28
4.3.2 Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path) ............................... 29
4.4 Erasure Unit ........................................................................... 29
4.4.1 Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit ............. 29
4.5 Cassette Unit ......................................................................... 30
4.5.1 Putting IP back into Cassette .......................................................... 30
4.5.2 Putting Cassette out of Digitizer ...................................................... 31
5 Software Architecture ............................................ 32
5.1 Checks (Software Version CR25_0120) ............................... 32
5.2 Web Pages ............................................................................. 32
5.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part ...................... 32
6 Signal and Data Flow ............................................. 33

6.1 Signal Flow ............................................................................ 33
6.2 Data Flow ............................................................................... 35
6.3 FLDXXXXX Directories.......................................................... 36
7 Calibration Principle............................................... 37
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)..................... 37
7.1.1 BOL................................................................................................. 37
7.1.2 BOS ................................................................................................ 37
7.1.3 Calibration Procedure...................................................................... 37
7.2 Shading Calibration............................................................... 38

1 Digitizer as a part of the ADC System

1.1 ADC System Components
ADC Cassette with image plate inside

The ADC cassette is the “container” for the image plate. During the handling
outside the Digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the image plate is in the
cassette. It is only opened inside the Digitizer. The ADC cassette has an
internal chip card which holds the cassette, patient, examination and routing
data belonging to a certain X-ray exposure. The data put together are called
demographic data.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a conventional system. It
receives the X-Ray radiation and “stores” a latent image. The image plates
can be reused thousands of times. The actual restriction of utilization is the
mechanical robustness.
Identification Tablet – CRUS (CR User Station)

The Identification Tablet is used to write the cassette, patient, examination
and routing data to the cassette chip. This data can be entered manually or
by retrieving the data from a Hospital or Radiology Information System
(HIS/RIS).
Writing and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a contact less
manner.
The Identification software is an AGFA product and implemented in the ADC
QS software.
ADC Digitizers (CR 75.0 / Compact / CR 25.0 / Solo)

The Digitizer is used to read the latent image in the image plate. After the
ADC cassette is exposed and identified it is inserted into the Digitizer. The
Digitizer reads the data on the cassette chip, opens the cassette, takes out
the image plate and scans it. The latent image on the image plate is
stimulated by means of a laser beam to emit light according to X-ray
exposure.
The data from the cassette chip is used to set the scan parameters correctly
(e.g. speed class, image plate size, etc.) for this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized into a
12/14bit, square root compressed raw image. This image is transmitted
together with the chip data on the fly via Ethernet to the Processing Station.
A backup of that image is made on the internal hard disk in parallel to
retransmit the image in case of transmission problems. The output format of
the Digitizer is DICOM SCU-CR.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased with very
bright light to make it ready for the next exposure. It is put back into the
cassette and a status flag on the cassette chip is set from “EXPOSED” to
“ERASED”. The cassette is returned to the user and is ready for the next
examination.

ADC QS Server Station

The ADC QS (Quality System) Server Station is a Windows XP-based
Workstation with the ADC Quality-System software installed.
The ADC QS Server Station receives the raw image from the Digitizer. Every
incoming image runs through an image processing. The processed images
are stored on the internal hard disk(s) of the Server station.
However, the QS Server station only provides short term storage. The final
archiving must be realized either by hardcopies or a PACS.
Further on, the QS Server station decodes the routing data and sends the
image data to the selected destinations (e.g. Printer, PACS)
A Softcopy can be sent to an Archive with 8 or 12 bit. To print a Hardcopy a
8 bit format is used.
For the QS Server station a lot of licensed software options (e.g. Annotation,
Print Composer, etc.) exist.
ADC QS Client Station
The ADC QS (Quality System) Client Station allows identification and basic
viewing.

1.2 Standard Work Flow of the ADC System
Figure 1

1.3 Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the ADC System
X-Ray device
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
Digitizer
ID-Data
ID-Station 5155_reg02_002.cdr
Figure 2
Dedicated configuration offers a time saving workflow (approximately one

minute for a two cassettes study). If only one ID Station is dedicated to one
CR 25.0, cassettes can be identified without using an ID-Tablet. This option is
called Direct ID. The demographic data are transmitted from the ID viewer to
the digitizer via the network. This data flow makes it possible to scan an IP
and to simultaneously enter the ID data.
• A speed class is selected on the CR 25.0 by use of the emergency
buttons. The sensitivity associated with the emergency buttons has been
set during the configuration of the system.
• An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.
• By entering the cassette, the digitizer reads the remaining cassette
information of the RF Tag and a communication channel to its dedicated
ID Station is opened.

• The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request

message to the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station
and the ID data have to be entered.
• After the user completed the information at the ID Station, it is sent back to
the digitizer. The communication channel is closed afterwards.
• The transmission of the scanned image to the Processing Station and the
Fast Preview image data is sent to the PRID-Station.
• Before the cassette is put out, the ID data on the RF Tag is erased and the
cycle counter is increased by the digitizer.
Dealing with an emergency cassette the identification can be left out at all.
Therefore, the user enforces the complete processing of the IP by pressing
the Confirm Key at the digitizer. The digitizer emits an ID Cancel command
to the ID Station, where the ID screen drops and the communication channel
is closed. The digitizer completes its emergency cycle and increases the
cycle counter of the cassette.
1.4 Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview
The features Direct ID and Fast Preview can also work in combination:
• A speed class, by use of the emergency buttons, is selected on the
digitizer.
• An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.
• The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request
message to the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID
Station and the ID data will be entered.
• While the user is entering the data, the Fast Preview screen of the PRID
is not visible. The transmission of the reduced Fast Preview image will
be postponed until the ID data is completely inserted.
• The digitizer sends the image to the Processing Station and parallel the
reduced Fast Preview image to the PRID. As soon as the calculation of
the image is finished, the Processing Station sends the preview image
to the PRID and replaces the Fast Preview.

2 ADC Cassettes
The principle function of the digitizer is close connected to the structure of the
ADC Cassettes. The digitizer accepts only ADC Cassettes. All other
cassettes, e.g. ADC 70, are refused.
2.1 Standard Cassette
The cassette must always be inserted 1 2 3
into the digitizer in the correct

orientation to make it possible to
4
identify and handle the cassette!
The ADC label and the label, showing 5
the size of the contained image plate,

are put on for the identification by the
user. 6
The metal label is detected by the

4
digitizer to identify the cassette as an
ADC cassette. Figure 3
The demographic data is at the ID-

Station transferred by no-touch radio 1 ADC label
frequency tagging to the ID-Chip and
is read out in the digitizer. The data is 2 ID-Chip carries demographic data
in that way always linked to the 3 Label showing size of Image Plate
image.
4 Sliders to prevent from usage in
For protection against electrostatic film handling devices
charging and mechanical damage the
inner lining of the cassette is made of 5 Metal label – silver dot – identifies
felt. an ADC Cassette
6 ADC Image Plate (gray surface
up, white surface down)

2.2 ADC MD30 Image Plate Principle
The image plate lying in the cassette consists of five different layers:
The phosphor layer is “storing” the Image Plate Structure

picture information as energy . 1
2
5146_reg02_003.CDR
3
The EBC top coat provides a smooth 4
surface of the image plate to reach a
good signal-to-noise ratio. 5
Combination of white support layer Figure 4

and blue anti-halo layer increases the
sensitivity. The anti-halo layer lets
through the stimulated light but (1) protective EBC (electron-beam-
blocks laser light. cured) coating
(2) phosphor layer
The laminate is needed as base (3) blue anti-halo layer

material. (4) white P.E.T support
(5) laminate
2.3 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassettes
To improve the image quality with Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) images a FLFS
CR Cassette is introduced.
The FLFS CR Cassettes are with
exception of two major differences
identical to the current standard ADC
Cassette (35 cm x 43 cm).
The differences are:
• Reduced backscatter
protection (minus 1.5 cm at
locking and hinge side)
• Specific FLFS labeling Figure 5
• All labels are yellow, which is
unique for FLFS
• Labeling “FLFS” to identify
cassette as type FLFS
• Yellow dots to recognize cassette
as FLFS also in buffer or stack I

2.4 ADC MD40 Image Plate Principle
The fourth-generation imaging plate is composed of the following six layers:
Figure 6
(1) protective EBC (electron-beam- (4) anti-halo layer

cured) coating (5) white P.E.T. support
(2) phosphor layer (6) laminate
(3) new adhesion layer
Improved phosphor layer

The storage phosphors used in the phosphor layer provide high absorption
efficiency and excellent homogeneity, while their short response time ensures
the fading of the previous pixel before stimulating the next one. A high level of
sharpness at all spatial frequencies is thus secured.
Since the phosphor layer has been improved, the ADC MD40 imaging plates
ensure increased image quality for lower doses, such as the 400 speed class.
Additional adhesion layer

Another new feature of the ADC MD40 imaging plate is the introduction of an
additional adhesion layer. This gives the ADC MD40 imaging plate better
mechanical stability than its forerunners, and prevents peeling at the corners.
EBC top-coating technology

Agfa's long experience and extensive research into plate abrasion resistance
has led to a dramatic improvement in EBC top-coating technology. This
improved technology has been used for the ADC MD30 as well as for the ADC
MD40.
White support layer and anti-halo layer

The use of a white support layer in combination with an anti-halo layer gives
high sensitivity. The anti-halo layer is an Agfa-patented blue layer that forms a
perfect barrier against laser light, but lets through the stimulated light.
Downward compatibility
Each ADC MD40 imaging plate is identified by a code on the back. The ADC
MD40, ADC MD30 and ADC MD10 plates can be used together without any
problem.

2.5 CR Mammo Cassette
Specification:
The CR Mammo Cassette is a dedicated cassette for use in combination with
CR Mammo Plates 2.00 for dedicated mammography applications. It features
a narrow hinge to allow scanning right up to the chest wall.
A distinctive feature of the CR Mammo Cassette in comparison with general

use ADC cassettes, is the narrower hinge. This means that there is a closer
contact with the skinline, offering an increased amount of information during
scanning.
The CR Mammo Cassette contains a CR CR image plate. This type of image

plate has a special phosphor layer which results in reduced noise and
increased sharpness. The cassette is equipped with a positioning mechanism
in order to ensure the chest wall distance to the image plate.
Identification:
The cassette is labeled with “Mammo” on both sides.
The cassette is pre-initialized as a Mammo Cassette, but if the identification is
lost, it can be given via the ID Station.
Figure 7
1 positioning mechanism for IP (2 x, left and right cassette side)
2 passive suction cup, keeping the IP in place inside the cassette
Formats:
The CR Mammo Cassette is available in two formats:
• 18 cm x 24 cm
• 24 cm x 30 cm

2.6 Asymmetric Cassette
Identification:
A Cassette for asymmetric scanning

can be identified by a red hatching
covering less than the half of the
cassette side. (see beside)
5146_reg02_004.cdr
Figure 8
Formats:
The ADC Asymmetric Cassette is available in:
• 21 cm x 43 cm (asymmetric partial scan of dedicated 35 x 43 cm
cassettes)
Specification:
The Asymmetric Cassette is dedicated for X-ray exposures where no centered
positioning of the part of the body is possible (e.g. side view of a spinal
column).

3 Modular Structure of the Digitizer

3.1 Overview of Modules
100
700
600
500
400
200 300
51
56
_re
g 02
_0
01
.cd
r
100 Frame
200 Power Unit
300 cPCI Rack
400 Scan Unit
500 Erasure Unit
600 IP Transport Unit
700 Cassette Unit
Figure 9

3.2 Cassette Unit
4
3
2
1
Figure 10
1 Cassette roller
2 Clamp unit
3 Cassette lift
4 Cassette position detection light barrier
5 Cassette opener 0-position light barrier
6 RF – tag reader
7 Finger to block Input / Output (I/O) slot
The cassette unit loads the cassette from the I/O slot, fixes and holds the
cassette during the IP is taken out and scanned. The RF-tag reader and the
antenna read out the ID- and image specific data.
After processing the IP cassette status is changed from “Identified” to

“Erased”. Cassette unit transports the cassette back to I/O slot for output.

3.3 Transport Unit
Figure 11
1 Vacuum pump
2 Suction cups
Within the transport unit the IP is taken out of the cassette and lead to the
scan unit.
After scanning, the IP is erased while it is moved upwards. The IP is put back
to the cassette in the cassette unit.

3.4 Scan Unit
2
3
Figure 12
1 Optic module with assembled Photomultiplier

2 Stepper motor boards
3 Slow scan motor
The function of the scan module is to stimulate a two dimensional, X-ray

exposed, image plate which is made of phosphor with laser energy. Out of the
blue light, which is emitted by the phosphor, a digital image is generated.
The stimulation of the image plate is done pixel by pixel, therefore the laser
beam is moved. The laser power on the focal plane is 50 mW + 5%. The
movement in the x-axis is achieved by a rotating polygon mirror (fast scan
direction) which is part of the optical path. The movement in the y-axis is done
mechanically by transporting the image plate (slow scan direction) with two
pairs of rolls.

The Scan mode 2 µs is used for 35 cm x 43 cm high resolution scanning.

A 1 µs scan mode has been established for 35 x 43 cm cassettes standard
resolution. It can be activated in key operator mode.
This principle has been enhanced to small formats < 35 x 43 cm.

Consequently, the throughput increases because of reduced scan time. The
1 µs scan mode option can be switched on in the key operator menu.
3.4.1 Laser Diodes

The optic module contains a monochromatic anamorph scan optic where the
laser beam is modified. The light source which is stimulating the image plate
are two red laser diodes, with a wavelength from 650 nm to 670 nm and a
maximal output of 50 mW each (see 2 in figure below). The increase and
decrease time of the laser power is shorter than 20 µs. The two beams of the
laser diodes are optical superposed to one and this is focused to have a spot
diameter of 60 µm on the scan surface.
Fa
st
sc
an
1 dir
e cti
on
Figure 13
3.4.2 Polygon
The Polygon has 6 facets, each with a mirror (see 1 in figure 11). It is turned
by a DC motor which is clock pulsed from the scanning hardware. Pixel times
between 2.5 and 0.6 µs can be reached, but for scanning are two times used,
1 and 2 µs.
3.4.3 Photomultiplier (PMT)

The light collection is done by two bundles of glass fiber and the light detection
is done by a photomultiplier tube, which generates an electrical signal out of it.
The light from the input of the photomultiplier is converted into a proportional
current on the output.

The amplification of the signal is set by the high tension voltage (HT) of the
photomultiplier. The high tension is calculated with two mathematical
constants MFA and MFB (machine factor A and B). The constants are part of
the settings of the digitizer and do not have to be changed in the field. The
high tension supply is integrated in the photomultiplier box.
The photomultiplier is equipped with a blue filter glass for separating the
emitted blue light from the stimulating red light. For self tests a blue LED is
mounted at the back side of the PM.
PMT
7
4 4
5 5
2
5155_reg02_025.cdr 3
Figure 14
3.4.4 Optic Module Housing

The housing is made of cast aluminum witch is electrical isolated to the
ground plate. The cover is made of conductive material to achieve
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The housing of the optic module stays
closed in the field and no service needs to be done inside.

3.5 Erasure Unit
3 2
Figure 15
1 Halogen lamps, 100 Watt

2 Erasure unit fan (part of the frame)
3 KG2 filter for heat protection
4 Front glass (UV filter with sensitive gelatin layer)
The lamps are controlled by the erasure control board. They are controlled
during work in pairs and also the power supply of 12 V is generated via 5
single transformer. For erasing the image plate a power input of in total 1000
Watt with 230V / 50Hz is present.
The erasure unit fan (placed in the Frame) is switched on during erasing the
image plate for cooling down the unit. The speed the IP is transported past the
erasure unit depends on speed class and format (Erasure energy per time is
determined by means of the demographic data).

3.6 cPCI-Rack
7
6
5
4
3 2
Figure 16
1 cPCI Rack Fan

2 cPCI Power Supply
3 CPU Ariel
4 Scan Master Board
5 Backplane
6 Hard disk
7 Floppy drive
The cPCI-Rack (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) consists of the

processing unit CPU, the Scan Master Board, the Power Supply of the cPCI-
Rack, a floppy drive and a hard disk. On top of the rack the fan for cooling the
cPCI-Rack is mounted and on the back the backplane with all the connectors
is placed.

3.6.1 CPU-Ariel
The CPU (Central Processing Unit) is a Power PC and is working with an

operating system called Ariel. The interfaces to the service and the Ethernet
are placed on the front plane.
Connector (female) to Service:

Service Interface Serial debug port connector, SuperIO
(RS232) and DUART
Fast Ethernet Controller:

Connector to Fast RJ45 connector, Fast Ethernet with 10
Ethernet to 100 Mbit/s
LED (3 green, 2 yellow, Software controllable with Portex tool

3
2
1 red) Software control
LED (FPGA NOT Conf. Hardware related signaling:
Green, TRAFFIC Ethernet Traffic – yellow LED
yellow, Ethernet LINK Ethernet linked – red LED
red) Hardware control FPGA not configured – green LED
Halt Switch HALT: Abort action

Reset Switch RESET: Global reset
Figure 17

3.6.2 Scan Master Board
The Scan Master Board controls the main functions of the digitizer which are
related to the image data acquisition. The board has to support two operating
levels, low resolution and high resolution. Therefore timing, frequency and
converters need to be controlled.
Photomultiplier Tube Control:

Connector (female) Controls the Photomultiplier itself, the high
to Photomultiplier voltage settings and receives the
Tube current/voltage (I/V) converter signal.
Polygon Control:
Connector (female) Controls via the Polygon the deflection of
to Polygon the laser beam on the image plate, controls
the rotational speed and detects the facets.
RF-Tag Reader Control:

Connector (male) Controls the transmitter and receiver
to RF-Reader signals for reading out demographic data of
the ADC Cassette.
User terminal Control:
Connector (female) Controls the user terminal via a 20 mA
to User terminal interface.
IO-BUS Control:
Provides the IO-BUS with power and
is connected via eight data lines and three
Connector (female) control lines to the IO-BUS.
to IO-Bus
Laser diode Module Control:

Controls the power supply of both laser
Connector (male) diodes of the laser module, controls the
to Laser Diode power switch of the laser diodes, controls
Module Begin-of-Line Signal and Laser-Power-
Monitor board.
5146_reg02_013.cdr
Figure 18

3.6.3 cPCI Power Supply
Legend to the LEDs

below, showing the
Output voltages
Green LEDs to
monitor power supply
5146_reg02_014.cdr
Figure 19
During normal operation the LEDs monitor 5,1 V and 3,3 V voltage levels.
Effects of Interlock Switches:

The power supply of the cPCI Rack is not interrupted by the interlock switch at
right side panel. This independent supply makes it possible to update software
or work out other actions at the rack while right side panel of the digitizer is
open.
The power supply of the cPCI Rack is interrupted by the interlock switch of the
front door. At the rack is no action possible while front door of the digitizer is
open.

3.6.4 Hard disk
The gray rectangle in the partition map marks the directories which are only
necessary for remote control via http access.
Partitions Directories and

Files Annotations
subdirectories
C: *.BAT
STARTUP.COM
batch
*.PPC program files

ERROR.MSG error message files
*.ESX tables
CGI-BIN *.PPC program files
PUBLIC *.html html files
DL *.zip zip files
*.GIF
IMAGES *.JPG
*.SYS system files

AOS.LOG current log file
D: ADC.CPF
*.AXX
*.CXX configuration files
*.UXX
ICN_XXXX.DAT infocounter (binary form)
C25_<S/N>.ICN infocounter (text form)
*.TBL tables
*.SHD calibration files
SHD *.TEMP
HTTP HTTPTEMP.OUT temporary files
E:
FLATFLD CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
FLATFLD2 CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
TESTIMG CONTROL.DAT test image

(Collection of diagnostic images)
IMAGE.DAT
TSHEET CONTROL.DAT testsheet of the optimum

IMAGE.DAT image quality
FLD00001 CONTROL.DAT image control file + demographic data

IMAGE.DAT image data
STATUS
TAGFILE change of status
STATUS only when emergency mode is activated

STATUS only when emergency mode is activated
LOG *.SES session files
temporary directory
SCCTMP BOLIMAGE.DAT
BOLIMAGE.INF
MFAIMAGE.DAT
MFAIMAGE.INF
SHDIMAGE.DAT
SHDIMAGE.INF
SNAPSHOT *.LOG uncompressed logfiles

*.TXT (without quickcheck and
machine state)
5156_reg02_32.cdr
Figure 20

3.7 Power Unit
Function of the power unit is to supply erasure unit, VME-Rack, stepper

motors and stepper motor boards with power. Power integration board is part
of the unit.
1 2 3
Figure 21
1 Main switch
2 Interlock switch
3 Power integration board
4 Fuse for Power Unit (2 A, slowblow – Si 201)
5 Fuse for Stepper motor transformer (2 A, slowblow – Si 202)

3.7.1 Power Integration Board
Main functions of power integration board are:

• Recognition and control of the required periphery
Vacuum pump
Magnetic valve
Erasure unit fan
Power unit fan
• Check of the following units directly via hard- or software
Magnetic valve
Interlock for SM-voltage
Stepper motor voltage of the transformer
Erasure unit fan
Vacuum pump (indirectly via current of the pump motor)
• LED's for error analysis
ST2 ST4
BU5 BU6 BU7 BU4
5155_reg02_015.cdr
Only the LEDs marked with a star are lighting in a machine that is in proper
condition.
Figure 22
ST2 Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in cassette unit (+40V)
BU5 Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in scan unit (+40V)

4 Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer
4.1 Cassette Unit
4.1.1 Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette

An ADC Cassette with an
exposed Image Plate (IP) inside
is set in correct orientation into
the I/O slot.
1
The light barrier (1) GS732/734
recognizes the cassette and 2
starts the mechanical process of
the digitizer.
The transport roller (2), moved
by motor M701, brings the
cassette into the cassette unit.
Figure 23
4.1.2 Identification of the Cassette

A plastic bolt, activated by the
rear slider of the cassette,
interrupts the cassette position
detection light barrier GS726
(1).
As only ADC Cassette have that
certain slider, it is made sure that
the right cassette in the correct
position is inserted.
Figure 24

4.1.3 Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID-Data
3
The cassette is lowered (1) by lift

motor M703 when a signal of
light barrier GS718 comes in.
In the lowered position the light 2
barrier GS724 , for starting the 1
clamp mechanism, detects the
cassette. The clamp motion is
run by motor M705.
While the cassette unit is moved
to the right side (2) the R/F-Tag
antenna (3) GS738 and the
corresponding R/F-Tag reader 2
GS736 read out the ID-Data from
the chip on the cassette.
The cassette unit is roughly
positioned corresponding to the
size of the cassette.
Figure 25
4.1.4 Opening the Cassette

In the clamped position the light
barrier GS716 detects the start
for the opening mechanism. 1
The cassette lid is opened by
motor M702 with a certain
number of steps.
51
55
_re
g0
2 _0
20
.cd
r
Figure 26

4.2 Transport Unit
4.2.1 Sucking the IP
The transport robot of the IP

transport unit (2), run by motor
M601, moves up quickly (see
arrow).
1
The suction cups (3) are moved
to the right position on the IP. IP
transport 0-position is detected 2
by GS604.
The vacuum pump GS608 starts
(1) to build up low pressure. By
3
opening the solenoid valve
GS606 the vacuum is transferred
to the suction cups and the IP is
sucked.
Figure 27
4.2.2 Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit
The IP is taken out of the

cassette and moved down (see
arrow) by the transport robot (1)
to the scan unit, driven by motor
M601.
By passing the light barrier
GS446 the scan rollers open (2), 1
driven by motor M401.
Vacuum is reduced and suction 2
cups release IP.
Figure 28

4.3 Scan Unit
4.3.1 Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit
The IP alignment finger (1)

positions the IP (2) relative to
scan unit by means of long 2
distance light barrier (3)
GS442/444 .
IP is moved by alignment finger,
3
until long distance light barrier (3)
is interrupted.
Afterwards the IP alignment
finger moves back until long
distance light barrier is no longer
interrupted. IP
Figure 29
The scan rollers close (1) and
clamp the IP between.
Scan rollers start to roll and
move the IP down until its edge
reaches the PIN diodes (2).
Figure 30

4.3.2 Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)
The IP is moved through the

scanner by M402.
The scan process is split into a
fast and a slow scan direction.
The laser power of the laser
diodes are lead to the IP via Fast s
c an
optical lenses and a polygon.
The light emitted from the IP is
transferred by two fiber optics to
the photo multiplier.
5156_reg02_003.cdr
Figure 31
4.4 Erasure Unit
4.4.1 Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit
As scan process is finished, scan 1
rollers stop to transport the IP in

slow scan direction.
Erasure lamps (1) switch on.
For unloading IP of scan unit the
scan rollers turn direction and
move IP upwards (see arrow).
Suction cups of transport unit are
positioned again on the surface
of IP and vacuum pump starts.
As the IP is sucked the scan
rollers (2) move apart and the IP
is moved by transport robot to 2
erasure unit.
The IP passes the erasure lamps
in a certain speed. The speed
depends on the format of the
cassette and on the examination
type. This information was given
by the chip on the cassette, read Figure 32
out at the begin of the cycle.

There are different speeds to

vary homogeneity and intensity
of the erasure effect on the IP.
As the complete IP passed the
erasure unit, lamps are switched
off.
The image information on the IP
is erased and the blank IP can
be used for another X-ray
exposure.
4.5 Cassette Unit
4.5.1 Putting IP back into Cassette
For putting IP back into cassette

the cassette unit has to be
positioned relative to IP.
Cassette unit moves to IP until Light
barrier
light barrier GS730 is interrupted IP
1
(1).
Light
Afterwards cassette unit moves

barrier
IP
2
back until light barrier is no
longer interrupted (2).
Transport robot puts IP back into
cassette. Vacuum is switched off
and suction cups release IP.
Figure 33
Transport robot moves down to
home position while cassette is
closed.

4.5.2 Putting Cassette out of Digitizer
Cassette unit moves to the left 1

while the RF-Tag (1) changes
status of cassette chip to
“erased”.
Cassette is released by clamping 2
mechanism and lifted.
I/O slot of digitizer is unlocked.
The transport belt, turned by
motor M704 , and transport roller
(3) move cassette out of the I/O
slot.
After removal of the cassette the
cassette unit moves to home
position.
3
Figure 34

5 Software Architecture
5.1 Checks (Software Version CR25_0120)
The checks help to find defective or misadjusted parts in the digitizer.
Checks available in Service Program of the Digitizer:

System check Rough check of complete system
creates a file in d:\ snapshot.txt
Send flatfield 1 Calibration pattern
2 Banding pattern
5.2 Web Pages
The Software of the digitizer allows access from the Internet to the service
level of the machine. The access via a graphic User Interface (ADC web
pages) is part of the service concept of HE GSO. The web pages follow the
structure of the well-known User Terminal.
Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making
use of standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows
working simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet.
Further information, see chapter 3.2.
5.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part
Spare parts which are sent with a floppy, need to be included in the system via
software. The floppy e.g. of the optic module contains specific settings of
production calibration and data of the spare part. This information need to be
installed after the spare part is mounted in the digitizer. For other spare parts
sent with a floppy only the information for the info counter is included.
The floppy is put into the floppy drive of the cPCI-Rack and the installation
starts automatically. The information concerning the spare part is integrated in
the system.

6 Signal and Data Flow

6.1 Signal Flow
Cassette Unit Optic Module
Demographic Data Image Data
10
cPCI Unit
IO-Bus Polygon Laser High

Calculation diodes tension
of scan
Raw Data 12 bit settings
Ethernet
100 Mbit
Service PC
cPCI Backplane
Legend:
Harddisk
RAM Image Data
Partition C:
Demographic
Data
Partition D: Raw Data (to
Proc. Station)
Lowpass Filter
Partition E: CPU
ARIEL
I/V converter
Figure 35

Functional Description
DD+DIS071.04E

(Type 5156) Agfa Group Confidential
DD+DIS071.04E
6.2 Data Flow
IP data
Cassette data Conversion of
Exposure emitted light
Destination into current
Patient
R/F Tag on the cassette Photomultiplier
Conversion from current to voltage

in the I/V - converter
Calculation of: Signal compression for grey scale

Scanspeed coordination (square rooted)
Voltage for high tension of PMT
Antialiasing-filter-frequence
Signalfiltering to avoid aliasing

Revolutions per minute of Polygon
Conversion from analog to

Voltage adaptation for high tension of PMT digital (14bit)
Start of scan with slow scan

speed = constant
Scan Master board
Raw image data and

demographic data via network to Raw image data in RAM
processing station
5146_reg02_056.cdr
Figure 36

DD+DIS071.04E
6.3 FLDXXXXX Directories
CONTROL.DAT (Image control file):
There are six possible status set in an image control file:
queued Waiting for transmission

sending: Transmission in progress
sent: Transmission completed, waiting for response
transmitted: Positive response from workstation
warning*: Positive response, but file cannot be handled
from workstation at the moment Æ new
transmission
error*: Faulty file, transmission cancelled
Only images being in a status marked with a "*" can be deleted from the
queue management.
STATUS
A status file will only be created when the operator pushes the emergency
button.
TAGFILE
File date and time when the status is changed.

DD+DIS071.04E
7 Calibration Principle
There are two different calibrations to work out with the Digitizer in the field.
The IP Center Calibration, which is necessary after replacement of the optic
module or a change on the mechanical adjustment of the begin of scan
sensor, and the shading calibration which is responsible for the image quality
and follows always after an IP Center Calibration.
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)
The IP center calibration adjusts two different scan signal settings in one
process, the begin of line (BOL) signal for the fast scan direction and the
begin of scan (BOS) signal for slow scan direction. Both signals in
combination are responsible for the area which is scanned and where pixels
are created.
7.1.1 BOL
The BOL sensor is a pin diode placed in the optic module. It controls the
switching off and on of the laser. The sensor is beside the IP, therefore the
laser beam hits the sensor before the IP. Out of the defined distance between
the sensor and the border of the IP the moment of reading out the pixel lines
on the IP is set.
7.1.2 BOS
The BOS sensor is a long distance light barrier which is placed at the bottom
part of the scan unit. The light barrier gives the signal to start the scan process
in slow scan direction. When the IP reaches the sensor it is detected and then
passes a fixed distance to the begin of scan line, then the scan process starts.
7.1.3 Calibration Procedure

The IP center calibration is
worked out with an IP format
smaller than 35 x 43 cm. In BOS
reference to this biggest format BOL BOL
the borders around the scanned
IP are detected. IP
e.g. 24 x 30 cm
format
The distance corresponding to the
BOS signal is measured from the
geometrical reference to the
Area covered by
border where the scanning of the a 35 x 43 cm IP
IP starts. The ideal distance is (reference)
defined with 5 mm.
The both distances measured to 5146_reg02_059.cdr

adjust the BOL signal must be
equal, means the IP is scanned in Figure 37
centered position.

DD+DIS071.04E
7.2 Shading Calibration
Inhomogeneities of the light collector (fiber optics) and the photomultiplier

require a position dependent calibration of the scan line. This pixel wise line
calibration evens out differences in the transmission behavior of the glass
fibers by calculation.
Each scanned pixel in a line is corrected arithmetically by its corresponding

correction value (shading correction). This is done for each of the three speed
classes 600, 200, and 75.
A number of lines of a flat field image are averaged and scaled to the
maximum pixel value. All the lines need to be in a certain range to make the
calibration successful, if not the error is displayed at the user terminal.
The calibration curves

can be viewed by using
a web browser.
(see chapter 3.2)
Three curves for each

format are displayed in
one image and
distinguished by three Figure 38
different colors.
The y-axis of the coordinate system shows the Scan Average Level (SAL)
which is the digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a
successful calibration. The x-axis shows the number of pixels.

HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Software / Hardware Compatibility
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 (Up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156 / 105 (As of SN ≥ 6000)
► Please note
The chapter “Software / Hardware Compatibility” has been replaced by following

documents:
• Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.

The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS098.09E Software / Hardware Compatibility
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 CR 35-X Chapter 2 / Page 2 of 2

05-2011 Type 5158 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS050.06E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instructions
Chapter 3.1
List of contents
1 Safety Regulations .......................................................................1

1.1 General............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Safety Switches............................................................................................... 1
1.3 Laser Products................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Electronic Components.................................................................................. 4
1.5 Erasure Unit..................................................................................................... 4
1.6 Battery Replacement in the GEMINI CPU and the Tag Reader ................... 5
2 Position of the Type Label...........................................................5

Edition 1, Revision 18 CR 25.0 Chapter 3.1 / I
2006-02-28 Type 5156 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
1 Safety Regulations
1.1 General
Check the following points visually with every repair work:

• Is the insulation of the mains plug or mains cable damaged?
• Is the mains cable damaged by the strain relief?
• Is the protective earth connected and are spring contacts OK?
• Are all protection covers in a correct condition?
1.2 Safety Switches
There are safety

switches at the front
door (A) and at the
right side panel (B). A
The safety switches

interrupt the mains
voltage supply when the B
front door is opened or
the right side panel is
removed.
figure 1: Positions of safety switches
WARNING!
When safety switches are blocked then there is a risk of injury
by moving mechanical or electrical parts and by the laser beam.
Use the service key and perform interventions only according to the service
documentation.
Remove the service key before the front door is closed or the right side panel
is mounted.
After having used the service key, check the function of the safety switch.

Edition 1, Revision 18 CR 25.0 Chapter 3.1 / 1
Repair and Service
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instructions DD+DIS050.06E
1.3 Laser Products
The CR 25.0 is a Class 1 Laser Product. It uses 2 x 50 mW laser diodes,

classification Class IIIb, in a housing.
Under normal operating conditions – when doors and covers are closed –
there can be no laser radiation outside the digitizer.
If the front door or the right side panel are opened to solve cassette or
image plate jams, the power supply of all critical components is switched off
automatically as a precaution.
WARNING!
A laser beam can hit your eye!
Looking directly into the laser beam can cause serious eye damage.
Do not open the optic module! It does not contain any serviceable parts!
Observe the label .
Do not block the safety switches, if any parts of the laser unit are uncovered!
Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools into the laser beam (risk of reflection).
Switch of digitizer during any service interventions.
Put on laser goggles (CM+9 9999 1547 0) when checking the optical path.
The laser goggles provide full protection: the transmission is reduced to a
millionth part or less.
User interventions other than those described in this manual can be
The local radiation safety regulations regarding the protection of staff against
scattered radiation must be complied with, if the CR 25.0 is located in the
immediate vicinity of an X-ray room.

Chapter 3.1 / 2 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 18
Agfa Company Confidential Type 5156 / 100 2006-02-28
Repair and Service
The positions of labels referring to laser radiation are depicted here:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASERKLASSE 1
dr
2. c
00
3 . 1_
g0
_re
56
51
figure 2: Warning labels referring to laser radiation

Repair and Service
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instructions DD+DIS050.06E
1.4 Electronic Components
CAUTION!
Static discharge may destroy electrical components.
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap
on a position of the frame which is free of lacquer.
Be attentive, that the frame is grounded!
1.5 Erasure Unit
WARNING!
The erasure unit may be
very hot and can cause
heavy burnings.
Keep your hands clear from
the erasure unit.
Watch the corresponding
label.
200 c
figure 3: Warning labels at erasure unit

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5156 / 100 2006-02-28
Repair and Service
1.6 Battery Replacement in the GEMINI CPU and the Tag Reader
WARNING!
Battery explosion can cause injury and destroy digitizer components.
Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.
Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
2 Position of the Type Label
figure 4: Position of the type label

Chapter 3.2
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Tools and auxiliary Means
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105
► Purpose of this document

This document describes tools and auxiliary means.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.0:
2.1 11-2012  Completely revised
 Integration of the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100
(up to SN < 6000) in this Service Documentation
Document Title
DD+DIS219.06E Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibration


eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2012 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Tools and auxiliary Means
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2012 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manual refer to the “Checklist for
Completeness” in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 3.2 / Page 2 of 70

11-2012 CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 100 / 105 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 MACHINE SPECIFIC TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT .........................................................5

2 SERVICE PC (STANDARD).....................................................................................................6
3 SERVICE PROGRAM OF THE DIGITIZER .............................................................................7
3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Working with the Operation Terminal .......................................................................................9
3.2.1 Service Menu with Password Protection ..................................................................................9
3.2.2 General Information ................................................................................................................12
3.3 Active Keys / Allowed Functions .............................................................................................12
3.4 Screen Layout .........................................................................................................................14
4 SERVICE MENUS ..................................................................................................................15

4.1 Service Menu: INFO ...............................................................................................................15
4.1.1 Device Info ..............................................................................................................................15
4.1.2 Network Info ............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Service Menu: MAINTENANCE..............................................................................................16
4.2.1 SAL Inspection ........................................................................................................................17
4.2.2 Calibration ...............................................................................................................................18
4.2.3 Test and adjust Cycle .............................................................................................................22
4.2.4 Confirm Maintenance..............................................................................................................27
4.2.5 Confirm Repair ........................................................................................................................28
4.2.6 Clear Infocounter ....................................................................................................................29
4.2.7 Confirm Modification ...............................................................................................................30
4.2.8 Confirm Installation .................................................................................................................31
4.3 Service Menu: SAVE data ......................................................................................................32
4.3.1 Infocounter File .......................................................................................................................32
4.3.2 Machine specific Data.............................................................................................................33
4.3.3 Service Report ........................................................................................................................35
4.3.4 Snapshot Log ..........................................................................................................................36
4.3.5 Session Files...........................................................................................................................38
4.3.6 CPF File ..................................................................................................................................39
4.3.7 Alert Log File ...........................................................................................................................40


Repair and Service
4.4 Service Menu: SHOW Error....................................................................................................41
4.4.1 Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................41
4.4.2 Error Hit List ............................................................................................................................42
4.5 Service Menu: INSTALL Data.................................................................................................43
4.5.1 Software ..................................................................................................................................43
4.5.2 Machine-specific Data.............................................................................................................46
4.5.3 PMT Settings (mfa/mfb) ..........................................................................................................47
4.5.4 Optic Parameters ....................................................................................................................48
4.5.5 Scanner Parameters ...............................................................................................................49
4.5.6 CPF-File ..................................................................................................................................51
4.5.7 Language Files .......................................................................................................................53
4.5.8 HW Modification ID .................................................................................................................55
4.6 Service Menu: CONFIGURE ..................................................................................................56
4.6.1 Local Network ID.....................................................................................................................56
4.6.2 User Terminal Language ........................................................................................................57
4.6.3 Active Alert System.................................................................................................................58
4.6.4 Direct ID ..................................................................................................................................61
4.6.5 Add-on Applications ................................................................................................................62
4.6.6 Service Protection...................................................................................................................63
4.6.7 Maintenance Notification.........................................................................................................66
4.7 Service Menu: CHECKS .........................................................................................................68
4.7.1 System Check .........................................................................................................................69
4.7.2 Send Image.............................................................................................................................70


Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools and Test Equipment
Tool Part Number* Purpose

Service PC Commercially available, Refer to section 2
requirements see
section 2
Interface cable RS232, CM+9 5120 9030 0 To transfer data between the
9 pin / 25 pins SUB D Service PC and Digitizer.
Test images CD ROM CM+9 5145 3055 0 To check image quality.
Network Cable Commercially available, To transfer data between the
acquire locally Digitizer and the Service PC
in case that web interface is
used.
Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 To override the safety
switch.
Copper Filter 1.5 mm CM+9 5155 1015 2 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 35-X
AL Filter 2.0 mm CM+9 5148 1090 0 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 35-X
USB Flash Drive with CM+9 5158 8810 3 Transfer data between the
Digitizer Software Service PC and digitizer and
c25_3206 install software.
Magnifying glass 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox.
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9 9999 0830 0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components.
CR Phosphor Plate 10+9 9999 1197 0 To clean the Image Plates.
Cleaner (2 bottles)
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0 To clean the Mammography
Image Plates.
Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml) CM+9 9999 9247 0 To grease the affected
mechanics.
Vacuum Cleaner Commercially available or To clean the digitizer during

(220 / 240V, 50 – 60 Hz) CM+9 9999 0895 0 maintenance.
Dirt bags for vacuum CM+9 9999 0896 0 To clean the digitizer during
cleaner (10 x) maintenance. Fits to
Vacuum Cleaner
CM+9 9999 0895 0
Lint free cloth Commercially available, To clean the digitizer during
acquire locally maintenance.


Repair and Service
Tool Part Number* Purpose

Flash light Commercially available, To check the digitizer -
acquire locally outside and inside.
Cutter Commercially available, To shorten cables.
acquire locally
Multimeter (Ohmmeter) Commercially available, To check resistance.
acquire locally
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
2 Service PC (standard)
The service PC is required to:

 Create or edit the adc.cpf file.
 Prepare the USB flash drive for e.g. software installation.
 Do service via terminal emulation.
 Run the show error program.
A commercially available laptop can be used as service PC with the following specific
requirements:
 USB port
The following additional equipment is required:
 External Floppy disk drive
 External USB serial port adapter for Serial port RS232
for the RS232 interface on the Digitizer


Repair and Service
3 Service Program of the Digitizer
3.1 Overview
For a detailed description of the service menus refer to section 4.
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3

1 INFO 1 Device info
2 Network info
2 MAINTENANCE 1 SAL inspection
2 Calibration 1 IP center calibration
2 Shading calibration
3 Test and adjust cycle 1 Scan with transmission
2 Scan cycle – no image
3 Scan – no era, no img
4 Handling cycle
5 Adjustment cycle
4 Confirm maintenance
5 Confirm repair
6 Clear infocounter
7 Confirm modification
8 Confirm installation
3 SAVE data 1 Info counter file
2 Machine specific data
3 Service report
4 Snapshot log
5 Session files
6 CPF-File
7 Alert log file
4 SHOW error 1 Explain error code
2 Error hit list


Repair and Service
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3

5 INSTALL data 1 Software
2 Machine specific data
3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)
4 Optic parameters
5 Scanner parameters
6 CPF-File
7 Language files
8 HW modification ID
6 CONFIGURE 1 Local network-ID
2 User terminal language
3 Active Alert System 1 Alert system status
2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
4 Direct ID
5 Add-on applications 1 Mammography (50µm)
3 Full Leg Full Spine
6 Service protection
7 Maint. notification
7 CHECKS 1 System check
2 Send image 1 Test image (mosaic)
2 Flatfield calibration
3 Flatfield banding
4 Test Sheet (jitter)
5 Blue LED test image
6 Mammo test image 1
7 Mammo test image 2
8 Extremity test image


Repair and Service
3.2 Working with the Operation Terminal
5155_reg01_002.cdr
Figure 1
3.2.1 Service Menu with Password Protection
Starts or finishes Service Menu
The service level is protected and only accessible via password entry.
When the protection mechanism is disabled, the service menu is only protected
through standard service password from Agfa.
When the protection mechanism is enabled the service menu is protected with access
code, license code and deactivation code for the individual device. The codes are
available from the Local Agfa Service Organization. For details how to enable/disable
the service protection tool refer to section 4.6.6.
After pressing the <SERVICE> key the user is asked to enter the service password.


Repair and Service
If the service protection is deactivated:
PASSWORD ?
Figure 2
(1) Enter the standard service password from Agfa (provided during classroom
training).
 This standard password cannot be changed.
 The entry of the standard service password does not change the display.
 No confirmation is required after standard service password entry.
Wrong A wrong entered code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD> message
code see Figure 5.
If service protection mechanism is activated and access is not expired:
Access code: 1____

change digit:   :ok
change position:  
Enter new license: press <Service> key
Figure 3
(1) Enter the access code (for details refer to section 4.6.6).
Wrong A not valid entered access code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD>
code message (see Figure 5) for about 5 seconds. Afterwards the program returns to the
operator level.
If the access code is expired, the screen <Renew service access> appears
(see Figure 4).


Repair and Service
If service protection mechanism is activated and access is expired or the serial number
encoded in the access code does not match with the device serial number:
Renew service access !

Please enter:
License code: 1____-_____-_____
_____-_____
Access code: 1____
change position:  
Figure 4
(1) Enter the license code and the access code (for details refer to section 4.6.6).
Wrong A not valid entered code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD> message
code (see Figure 5) for about 5 seconds. Afterwards the program returns to the operator
level.
WRONG PASSWORD
Figure 5


Repair and Service
3.2.2 General Information
After each intervention where machine specific data, network settings or language
settings are changed, a message appears: <Parameters have changed,
refresh your backup>.
As long as the installation of the Digitizer has not been confirmed, the operator is asked
after each startup if he wants to confirm the current date as date of installation (see
Figure 6). This reminder screen can be skipped by pressing the <> key until next
startup.
If the installation is confirmed, the reminder screen would not pop up again.
Installation
Installation not yet Confirmation
confirmed!

Press  to confirm now :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 6
3.3 Active Keys / Allowed Functions
ok - starts the highlighted function
cancel - cancels the function and returns to the next higher menu
level
forward or backward scrolling
tag - possibility to select several items out of a list
returns immediately to the operator level, exits the service level
All other keys are inactive and cause a long beep when pressed.
The menus in the service mode can be classified in four different modes:
1) Selection mode
2) Instruction mode
3) Information mode
4) Decision mode


Repair and Service
1) Selection mode:
 The currently selected item appears highlighted (inverse display).
 When you enter a new menu, always the first item of the list is selected by
default.
 A new item can be selected by using the up and down keys <>.
 Multiple selections (tags) can be done using <> keys
(known as toggles/selections).
 Press <> to confirm your selection or to enter the highlighted
sub-menu.
 Press <> to exit the current menu and to return to the next higher level.
2) Instruction mode:
 In this mode, read the given instructions carefully and follow them
step by step.
3) Information mode:
 In this mode, information can be read on the display. No interactions are
possible.
4) Decision mode:
 In this mode, you will be prompted to confirm or cancel the proposed action.
 In case a decision is required a double beep comes up every 10 seconds.
 Press <> to confirm the action, return to the higher level or to enter the next
screen.


Repair and Service
3.4 Screen Layout
The same screen layout is used for all service menus. The screen is subdivided into
four windows:
Service menu
2
: cancel
1
3
: ok
4
Service XXXX
515562ee.cdr
Figure 7
the action window  displays selection lists, instructions, information, questions

orientation window  displays the current service menu level
key help window  explains the meaning of the involved keypad buttons
service message displays service messages
window 
is displayed if scroll functionality is requested, e.g. if a list

and cannot be shown in total
is displayed if selection functionality is requested, e.g. if
and several items have to be marked in a list


Repair and Service
4 Service Menus
4.1 Service Menu: INFO
This menu provides general information about the Digitizer and its network settings.
1 INFO Service menu

2 MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW
3 SAVE data
4 SHOW error 
5 INSTALL data :cancel
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 8
4.1.1 Device Info
This menu item displays information about the Digitizer.
1 Device info Service menu

2 Network info Info

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 9
Station: <stationname> Service menu

S/N: 1024 Info
AE-title: <aetitle> Device info
Software: c25 3206 
Total cycles: 34567
Next PM: 60424 :ok
Last rep.: 01-Jan-2010 
02-Mar-2011 14:24:58 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 10
<Station:> shows the station name of the Digitizer, which is not the host name.
<S/N:> shows the 4 digit serial number of the Digitizer


Repair and Service
4.1.2 Network Info
This menu displays information about the network settings of the Digitizer.
1 Device info Service menu

2 Network info Info
Network info

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 11
Hostname: <hostname> Service menu

INFO
IP-addr: 192.9.200.201 Network info
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 
D-Router: 192.9.200.254
Mail-Host:192.9.200.210 :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 12
4.2 Service Menu: MAINTENANCE
This service menu provides features for maintenance functions.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 13


Repair and Service
4.2.1 SAL Inspection
Procedure to measure the average scan level of an image plate as a result of a certain
stimulation energy. This information can be used in two ways. Either to decide whether
the IP needs to be erased or to find out the correct exposure parameters for a given
X-ray device.
The measured value (scan average level) is displayed on the LCD. Additionally the
corresponding scan line is displayed on the LCD.
1 SAL inspection Service menu

2 Calibration Maintenance
3 Test and adjust cycle
4 Confirm maintenance 
5 Confirm repair :cancel
6 Clear infocounter :ok
7 Confirm modification 
8 Confirm installation SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 14
Service menu
Maintenance
Please select the speed SAL inspection
class for SAL inspection 
:cancel
200 :ok

...select with  or  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 15
Default speed class = 200
Service menu
Place cassette for Maintenance
inspection into the SAL inspection
cassette entry slot 
:cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 16
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection pending. SAL inspection
Wait for result... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 17


Repair and Service
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
 
Cassette ID: XXXXX :cancel
SAL: 264 :ok

...press  to continue SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 18
The scanned line is displayed on the LCD, the screen appears with a double beep.
(1) Press  to confirm the SAL-Inspection for that IP. If available, the next IP in the
row is inspected.
(2) Press  to cancel the function and returns to the next higher level.
4.2.2 Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform an IP Center Calibration and a Shading
Calibration
For details about how to perform the calibrations refer to Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments
and Calibrations.

Figure 19
NOTE:
If an identified cassette (regular identification via ID station, status exposed, to be
erased) is detected, a message is displayed:
 Cassette is identified with patient data, see Figure 20
 Cassette is identified to be erased, see Figure 21
The user has to confirm the calibration function:
 - starts the calibration procedure,
 - the cassette is treated according to its identification status (to be erased, exposed)


Repair and Service
Service menu
Maintenance
Cassette is identified Calibration
with patient data. 
Press  to calibrate :cancel
or  to scan. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 20
Service menu
Maintenance
Cassette is identified Calibration
To be erased. 
Press  to calibrate :cancel
or  to erase. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 21
4.2.2.1 IP Center Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform an IP Center Calibration.

The required work steps for IP Center Calibration are described in detail in
Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations.
1 IP Center Calibration Service menu

2 Shading Calibration Maintenance
Calibration

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 22
Exposure parameters: Service menu

Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy IP Center
turn 180 degree 
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Insert cassette 24x30cm 
or smaller. SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 23


Repair and Service
If a format 10 x 8", 24 x 18 cm, 24 x 30 cm is detected, the calibration procedure starts

immediately.
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center Calibration IP Center
pending... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 24
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center Calibration IP Center
successful. 
:ok
Run a Shading Calib. now 
(Recommended). SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 25
In case IP Center Calibration adjustment was successful:

(1) Press <> to return to the calibration screen.
For a detailed description of possible reasons for a failed IP Center Calibration refer to


Repair and Service
4.2.2.2 Shading Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform a shading calibration.

Shading correction factors for all image plate formats are determined. The resulting
scan line is displayed on the LCD. Additional information about cassette formats,
calibration results, possible fail reasons and detected SAL is given.
The required work steps for the shading calibration are described in detail in
1 IP Center Calibration Service menu

2 Shading Calibration Maintenance
Calibration

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 26
Which application Service menu

shall be calibrated? Calibration
Shading
1 GenRad fast ok 
2 GenRad slow ok :cancel
3 Mammo :ok
4 Extremity 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 27
(1) Press <> to return to the calibration screen.

(2) Press <> to enter next screen.
For <Mammo>:
Two possible exposure types can be chosen. The action starts as soon as a cassette
is inserted.
Select exposure type Service menu

Calibration
1 GenRad Shading
2 Mammo 
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 28


Repair and Service
For GenRad exposures:

Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
turn 180 degree 
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 29
For Mammo exposures:

Filter: 2 mm Al Calibration
Exp. technique: Mo/Mo Shading
200 mAs, 28 kVp 
No compression paddle :cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 30
If the shading calibration has been successful the message <Calibration

successful> pops up.
(1) Press <> to confirm and return to the shading calibration menu.
For a detailed description of possible reasons for failed shading calibration refer to
4.2.3 Test and adjust Cycle
This service menu provides different endurance run cycles to check the proper function
of the cassette and IP transport.

Figure 31


Repair and Service
4.2.3.1 Scan with Transmission
This endurance run cycle:

 requires identified cassette
 cycles cassette and IP
 scans the IP
 erases IP
 transmits image as identified
 informs about the current cycle number
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be
aborted with <>.
1 Scan with transmission Service menu

2 Scan cycle – no image Maintenance
3 Scan – no era, no img Test cycle
4 Handling cycle 
5 Adjustment cycle :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 32
Selection of number of cycles:
Service menu
Use  and  to Maintenance
select no of cycles: Test cycle

XXXX :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 33
Information about the status:
Service menu
No of cycles selected: Maintenance
150 Test cycle

Current run: :cancel
64

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 34


Repair and Service
4.2.3.2 Scan Cycle - No Image

 scans the IP
 erases IP
 does not transmit the image
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be aborted
with <>.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 35
For selection of number of cycles and Information about the status: see Figure 33 and
Figure 34.
4.2.3.3 Scan - no era, no img

 scans IP
 does not erase
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be
aborted with <>.


Repair and Service

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 36
Figure 34.
4.2.3.4 Handling Cycle

 cycles regardless if cassette is identified or not
 cycles IP
 does not scan IP
 does not erase
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be aborted
with <>.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 37
Figure 34.


Repair and Service
4.2.3.5 Adjustment Cycle
This service menu allows performing an automated adjustment of the pick up position
to take the image plate out of the cassette.
 Asks the user to insert cassette of the format 24x30 or 18x24.
 Prompt the user to perform an automated adjustment, where a software routine
repeats approaching the image plate, until it finds the optimal position for the
suction cups to take the image plate out of the cassette.
 Displays the result of the adjustment with the values before and after the
adjustment.
 In case of a not successful adjustment, possible remedies are displayed.
 Guides the user to initiate a backup after successful adjustment of the pick up
position.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 38
Adjustment of pick up IP Service menu

out of the cassette Maintenance
Adjust cycle
Please insert GenRad 
cassette of any format :cancel
to start adjustment

To abort press  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 39
Adjusting the pick up IP Service menu

out of the cassette Maintenance
Adjust cycle

Please wait ...

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 40


Repair and Service
Adjustment completed Service menu

successfully. Maintenance
Value before adjustment: Adjust cycle
xxxx 
Value after adjustment:
xxxx :ok
Remove cassette and 
press  to continue SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 41
Problem detected! Service menu

Maintenance
Please examine: Adjust cycle
- Check IP in cassette 
- Check vacuum system
- Check mechanics :ok

Press  to confirm SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 42
Service menu
Parameters have changed. CONFIGURE
You should refresh your
backup now. 
Please insert the backup :cancel
medium and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 43
4.2.4 Confirm Maintenance
This service menu provides a feature to confirm a performed preventive maintenance

and log this event in the infocounter file with the current date and time.
After pressing <confirm>, the operator is asked to clear the relative counters in the
infocounter file. The reset of the relative counters is linked to the event “Maintenance”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 44


Repair and Service
Service menu
To confirm this Maintenance
maintenance press  Confirm PM

:cancel
Meter reading: xxxxxx :ok
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy> 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 45
(1) Press <> to return to the “maintenance” screen.

(2) Press <> to enter the next screen.
Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm PM
the info counters? 
(recommended) :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 46

(2) Press <> to clear the relative info counter entries.
4.2.5 Confirm Repair
This service menu provides a feature to confirm successful repair with a date stamp.
This event is logged in the infocounter file with the current date and time.
infocounter file. The reset of the relevant counters is linked to the event “Repair”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 47


Repair and Service
Service menu
To confirm a successful Maintenance
repair press  Confirm repair

:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 48

Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm repair
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 49

4.2.6 Clear Infocounter
This service menu provides an option to clear the relevant info counter entries without
a link to a special service intervention.
The reset is linked in the infocounter file to the dummy event ”Test”. Date and counter
stamp is added.

3 Test cycle
Figure 50


Repair and Service
4.2.7 Confirm Modification
This service menu provides a feature to confirm modifications and to log this event in
the infocounter file with the current date and time.
infocounter file. The reset of the relevant counters is linked to the event “Repair”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 51
Service menu
To confirm a successful Maintenance
modification press  Confirm modif.

:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 52

Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm modif
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 53



Repair and Service
4.2.8 Confirm Installation
This service menu provides a feature to confirm the successful installation of the
Digitizer. The current date and time is than logged in the infocounter file as date of
installation. The installation can only be confirmed once.
As long as the installation of the Digitizer is not confirmed, a reminder message will pop
up after each startup and asks to confirm the current date as date of installation (see
Figure 6).

3 Test cycle
Figure 54

Service menu
Maintenance
Install date
To confirm this 
installation press  :cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 55



Repair and Service
4.3 Service Menu: SAVE data
This service menu provides a feature to save relevant data, which are stored on the
internal hard disk of the Digitizer on an external storage medium.
Depending on the Digitizer hardware this external storage medium can either be an
USB flash drive (via USB port on the Revive board) or floppy disks (via floppy disk
drive).
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 56
4.3.1 Infocounter File
This service menu provides a feature to save the infocounter file on the storage
medium:
 The infocounter file named C25<serial#><A-Z>.ICN is saved in the root of
the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C252034A.ICN
 If an infocounter file is already available on the storage medium, the file name of
the new infocounter file will be adapted (last digit of the file name is increased in
alphabetic order) to prevent overwriting.
 Info counters (relative counters) can be cleared by means of maintenance or
repair confirmation or manually by selecting menu <Clear infocounter>
(refer to section 4.2.6).
 Exceptions (e.g. error handling, messages in case of no floppy available, write
protection, full floppy, etc.) are displayed, e.g. ”Floppy is write protected”.
1 Info counter file Service menu

2 Machine specific data SAVE
3 Service report
4 Snapshot log
5 Session files 
6 CPF-File :cancel
7 Alert log file :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 57

Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Info counter
storage medium 
and press  :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 58
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Info counter
D:<file name> 
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 59
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Info counter
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 60
4.3.2 Machine specific Data
This service menu provides a feature to create a backup of machine specific data on a
removable storage medium:

3 Service report
4 Snapshot log 
5 Session files :cancel
6 CPF-File :ok
7 Alert log file 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 61


Repair and Service
(1) Click <ok>.

A zipped file named C25_<serial#>.zip, which contains all relevant
machine specific data, is created in a first step on the hard disk of the Digitizer.
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Machine data
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 62
(2) Insert the storage medium and click <ok>:

 The storage medium (e.g. floppy) gets a volume label
C25_<serial#>BAC
(<serial#> represents the 4 digit serial number of the device).
 The zip file is copied in a next step to the removable storage medium in a
folder named C25_<serial#>.BAC.
Example: C25_2304BAC:\C25_2304.BAC\C25_2304.zip
 If the removable storage medium contains already a folder with a backup
this folder will be renamed to C25_<serial#>.BCO.
 The zip file in an already existing C25_<serial#>.BCO folder will be
overwritten.
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Machine data
D:\C25_<serial#>.zip 
To
A:<path><file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 63
An instruction screen is displayed.

(3) Label the storage medium as described.
Label the storage medium Service menu

SAVE
Backup CR25.0 Machine data
S/N: <serial#> 
Date: <date>
SW-version: c25_3206 :ok
Please remove the medium 
and press  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 64


Repair and Service
4.3.3 Service Report
This service menu provides a feature to save the service report, created during a
service session, on a removable storage medium:
 A service session starts when the service mode is entered
 All activities are logged with date and time stamp
 Ring buffer principle with 20 sessions
 Saves the service report file on a storage medium
 The service report file named C25_<serial#>.RPT is saved in the root of the
removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046.RPT
 If the removable storage medium contains already a file with a service report this
file will be renamed to C25_<serial#>.RPO.
Example: A:\C25_2046.RPO
 An already existing C25_<serial#>.RPO file will be overwritten.

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 65
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Service report
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 66
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Service report
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 67


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Service report
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 68
4.3.4 Snapshot Log
This service menu provides a feature to copy a Snapshot log (compressed) on a

storage medium:
 The zip file named C25_<serial#>_<error code#><incrementing
id>.zip is saved in the root of the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046_2060B_2.zip
 One, several or all snapshot log can be selected (tagged) by means of the
<> - keys.
 Tagged files are marked with <*>.
 If there are more files in the list than can be displayed: <> symbolize the
scroll option.
 If there is not enough disk space another storage medium is asked for.
 If there is no tag set the current selected item is operated.

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 69
(1) Press <> to return to the “save data” screen.



Repair and Service
All Snapshot logs  Service menu

2060B 04-Feb-2004 11:26* Save
2060B 01-Feb-2004 10:43* Snapshot log
247B0 23-Jan-2004 17:08 
:cancel
:ok :tag

 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 70
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Snapshot log
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 71
Service menu
SAVE
Storage medium is full. Snapshot log
Please insert another 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 72
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Snapshot log
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 73


Repair and Service
4.3.5 Session Files
This service menu provides a feature to copy session files on a storage medium:
 The session file named #.ses is saved in a folder C25_<serial#> on the
Example: A:\C25_2046\143.ses
 Leading zeros will be suppressed, e.g. 005.ses  5.ses
 One, several or all session files can be selected (tagged) by means of the
<> - keys.
 Tagged files are marked with <*>.
 If there are more files in the list than can be displayed: <> symbolize the
scroll option.
 If there is not enough disk space another storage medium is asked for.
 If there is no tag set the current selected item is operated

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 74
All session files  Service menu

1.ses * SAVE
2.ses * Session file
3.ses 
4.ses :cancel
5.ses :ok :tag

 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 75
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Session file
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 76


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Storage medium is full. Session file
Please insert another 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 77
4.3.6 CPF File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the customer parameter file (CPF) from
hard disk to a storage medium.
 The customer parameter file named ADC.CPF is saved in the root of the
Example: A:\ADC.CPF

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 78
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the CPF File
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 79
Service menu
SAVE
copying... CPF File
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 80


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the CPF File
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 81
4.3.7 Alert Log File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the alert log file from hard disk to a
storage medium:
 The alert log file named C25_<serial#>.ALR is saved in the root of the
Example: A:\C25_2046.ALR
 The file contains 50 entries
 Service report format
 The content of the sent e-mail is logged

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 82


Repair and Service
4.4 Service Menu: SHOW Error
This service menu provides a feature to display:

 Error codes in plain text
 Error hit list
 Explanations of errors and warnings
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 83
4.4.1 Explain Error Code
This service menu provides a feature to explain the highlighted error (warning) code.
Date and time of occurrence are displayed.
1 Explain error code Service menu

2 Error hit list SHOW error

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 84
(1) Select the code using the < > keys.

The current device error or warning status is highlighted.
Code Occurred last Service menu

SHOW error
XXXXX 04-Feb-97 11:26 Explain code
XXXXX 26-Jan-97 14:58 
XXXXX 12-Jan-97 09:34 :cancel
XXXXX :ok
XXXXX 
XXXXX SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 85


Repair and Service
(2) Select <> to display the explanation.
XXXXX Service menu

Text... Show error
Explain code

:cancel
:scroll

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 86
4.4.2 Error Hit List
This service menu provides a feature to display a list of the five most frequent errors.
1 Explain error code Service menu

2 Error hit list SHOW error

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 87
Code: Frequency: Service menu

absolute relative SHOW error
Hit list
00342 27 6 
00541 23 4 :cancel
95462 9 4 :ok
12124 4 3 :scroll
99999 1 1 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 88
(1) Select a code using the < > keys and confirm with  to display the
explanation (see Figure 86).
(2) Go back to error hit list with <>.


Repair and Service
4.5 Service Menu: INSTALL Data
This service menu provides a feature to copy selected files from a storage medium
(e.g. floppy or USB flash drive) to hard disk and initializes the data if applicable.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 89
4.5.1 Software
This service menu provides a feature to copy the device software from a storage
(floppy disk or USB flash drive) medium to hard disk and initializes the new software:
 All concerning file names are displayed during the copy process.
 After software installation the user is prompted to create a new backup floppy.
 An entry is made in the infocounter under SW modification history, date, meter
reading.
1 Software Service menu

2 Machine specific data INSTALL
4 Optic parameters 
5 Scanner parameters :cancel
6 CPF-file :ok
7 Language files 
8 HW modification ID SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 90
Service menu
Please insert the INSTALL
storage medium or the Software
first floppy C250105_1_3 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 91


Repair and Service
Service menu
Checking INSTALL
the volume label... Software

Volume is
<label>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 92
If the volume label is not correct, a message <Wrong or missing volume label>
pops up (long beep).
Service menu
INSTALL
copying... Software
A:<file name> 
to :cancel
E:\temp\<file>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 93
If the software is installed from floppy disks, the second floppy and analogue more
floppies are requested to insert:
Service menu
Please insert the INSTALL
floppy C252007_2_3 Software
And press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 94
Service menu
INSTALL
please wait ... Software

Extracting files from
E:\temp

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 95


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
Installation done. Software
Please remove the 
storage medium
and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 96
Service menu
To initialize the new SW INSTALL
a reset is necessary Software

Press  to reset now
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 97
(1) Press <> to initialize new software.

(2) After the first start-up of the new software, press <> and insert a backup
medium to create a new backup.
Service menu
New software detected. INSTALL
You should refresh your Software

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 98
(3) Press <> to go to <Save machine specific data>.


Repair and Service
4.5.2 Machine-specific Data
This service menu provides a feature to restore machine specific data (machine
backup) from the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) to the hard disk:
 The volume label is checked.
 The concerning file name C25_<serial#>.ZIP is displayed during the copy
process.
 The zip file is automatically unzipped.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 99
Service menu
INSTALL
Please insert the backup Machine data
medium and press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 100
Service menu
Please wait... INSTALL
Machine data
Extracting backup files 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 101
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Machine data
Storage medium 
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 102


Repair and Service
4.5.3 PMT Settings (mfa/mfb)
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters (e.g. mfa/mfb values)
of the PMT module, which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive)
attached to the spare part, to the hard disk:
 Overwrites existing files.
 The concerning file name is displayed during the copy process.
 Request to save changes on service exit.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 103
After Service menu

Photo multiplier change: INSTALL
Mfa/mfb
Please insert the medium 
with PMT data :cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 104
(1) Verify if the serial number of the label is the same as the serial number of the
new part.
 The serial number is displayed on the screen.
 The serial number is automatically stored in the infocounter under
<hardware replacement> history.
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name> ... Mfa/mfb


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 105


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Mfa/mfb
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 106
(2) Refresh the backup when exiting the service menu.
4.5.4 Optic Parameters
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters of the optic module,
which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) attached to the spare
part, to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 107
After laser change: Service menu

INSTALL
Please insert the medium Laser factor
with optics module data 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 108
new part.


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name> ... Laser factor


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 109
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Laser factor
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 110
You introduced a new Service menu

component in the optical INSTALL
Path Laser factor
A new calibration is 
necessary
:ok
Press  to calibrate... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 111
(2) Press <> to go to < calibration> menu.
4.5.5 Scanner Parameters
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters of the scanner
module, which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) attached to
the spare part, to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 112


Repair and Service
After scanner Service menu

replacement: INSTALL
Scanner
Please insert the medium 
with scanner data :cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 113
new part.
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name>... Scanner


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 114
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Scanner
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 115
You introduced a new Service menu

component in the optical INSTALL
path. Scanner
A new calibration is 
necessary.
:ok
Press  to calibrate... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 116
(2) Press <> to go to < calibration> menu.


Repair and Service
4.5.6 CPF-File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the CPF-file from a storage medium to
the hard disk:
 Overwrites the existing file.
 The file name is displayed during the copy process.
 Refers to the "configure local network ID" screen.
 Request to save changes when exiting service.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 117
Service menu
Please insert medium INSTALL
with the CPF file CPF-file
and press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 118
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name>... CPF-file


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 119
Service menu
COPY
Please remove the CPF-file
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 120


Repair and Service
(1) Press <> to check if image queue is empty.
If the image queue is not empty:
Image queue not empty! Service menu

INSTALL
Check the queue then CPF-file
restart ”CONFIGURE - 
Local network-ID” :cancel
:ok
Press  to continue... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 121
If the image queue is empty:

 the highlighted name e.g. CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the Digitizer
 the current valid network ID is also highlighted
Confirm ID or select new Service menu

CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201 CONFIGURE
CR250xxxxxxx2 .....202 Local net ID
CR250xxxxxxx3 .....203 
CR250xxxxxxx4 .....204 :cancel
CR250xxxxxxx5 .....205 :ok :more
CR250xxxxxxx6 .....206 
CR250xxxxxxx7 .....207 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 122
(2) Press <> to initialize the new settings.
If the CPF file is corrupt, it is rejected by the digitizer and following message appears:
Service menu
CPF-File is corrupted. CONFIGURE
Local net ID
Repeat with a correct 
one.
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 123
(3) Press <> to go back to the menu <installation>.


Repair and Service
After activation of the new CPF a new backup is requested:
Service menu
Backup now. 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 124
(4) Press <> to go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
4.5.7 Language Files
This service menu provides a feature to install new language files for the operator
screens on the local display of the Digitizer. After successful installation of the
language files the requested language can be selected.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 125
Service menu
INSTALL
Please insert the medium Language files
with language data 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 126
It is checked whether the language floppy is compatible with the current software
version. If the language floppy does not fit, a warning is displayed.


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
copying... Language files
A:<file name> 
to
C:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 127
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Language files
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 128
Service menu
INSTALL
Do you want me to change Language files
my user terminal 
language? :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 129
(1) Press <> to go to menu <Configure user terminal language>.


Repair and Service
4.5.8 HW Modification ID
This service menu provides a feature to record a hardware modification of the device.
The modification ID (service part number), which is on the storage medium (floppy disk
or USB flash drive) attached to the modification kit, is copied to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 130
(1) Verify if the modification ID of the storage medium label is the same as the
modification ID of the new part:
 The hardware modification ID with its description is displayed on the
screen.
 The modification ID is automatically stored in the infocounter under
 One storage medium can contain several modification IDs.
Example:
Did you mount...? Service menu
CM+9 5155 xxxx 2 INSTALL
IP transport HW modific.

:cancel
Press  to confirm :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 131
(2) Save changes when exiting the menu.


Repair and Service
4.6 Service Menu: CONFIGURE
This service menu provides a feature to configure device specific settings and
parameter.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 132
4.6.1 Local Network ID
This service menu provides a feature to define the network settings of this Digitizer by
selecting the Digitizer AE title out of a list of possible names (out of the CPF).
1 Local network ID Service menu

2 User terminal language CONFIGURE
3 Active Alert System
4 Direct ID 
5 Add-on applications :cancel
6 Service protection :ok
7 Maint. notification 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 133
(1) Select desired name using <>-keys. The name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the
AE-title of the Digitizer.
(2) Press <> to initialize the new name.
Select from list Service menu

CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201 CONFIGURE
CR250xxxxxxx2 .....202 Local net ID
CR250xxxxxxx3 .....203 
CR250xxxxxxx4 .....204 :cancel
CR250xxxxxxx5 .....205 :ok :more
CR250xxxxxxx6 .....206 
CR250xxxxxxx7 .....207 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 134


Repair and Service
(4) Press <> to go back to the menu <configure>.

(5) Press <> to save settings and go back to the menu <configure>.
(6) After confirmation with <OK> the screen to refresh the backup appears.
Service menu

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 135
(7) Press <> and go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
4.6.2 User Terminal Language
This service menu provides a feature to configure the language for the operator
screens on the local display of the Digitizer.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 136
(1) Select desired language using <>-keys. Only language files, which are stored
on the hard disk of the Digitizer can be selected, see also section 4.5.7
(2) Press <> to initialize the new language.
Select from list: Service menu

Dutch CONFIGURE
English (default) Language
French 
German :cancel
Italian :ok :more
Dutch 
Spanish SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 137


Repair and Service
(4) Press <> to go back to the menu <configure>.

(5) Press <> to save settings and go back to the menu <configure>.
(6) After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears.
Service menu
floppy and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 138
(7) Press <> and go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
NOTE:
Only the main language is displayed:
No distinction between regional language differences, e.g. German for Austria, English
for Australia is made.
4.6.3 Active Alert System
This service menu provides a feature to configure an alert mailing system.

The alert system is able to monitor the status of the device. If certain thresholds are
reached a message (e-mail) is sent to a specified destination. The alert system is used
for preventive maintenance.
This menu provides features to switch on/off the alert mechanism and to configure the
destination.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 139


Repair and Service
4.6.3.1 Alert System Status
This service menu provides a feature to enable/disable the alert mailing mechanism.
1 Alert system status Service menu

2 Alert destination CONFIGURE
3 Send test alert Alert System

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 140
Alert system status Service menu

CONFIGURE
disable Alert System
Change status with : 
:cancel
Alert destination: :ok 
10.6.5.152 
Alert sent: 0 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 141
4.6.3.2 Alert Destination
This service menu provides a feature to set the alert mail destination (IP address).

2 Alert destination CONFIGURE
3 Send test alert Alert System

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 142


Repair and Service
NOTE:
The IP address of the alert destination (mail host) can be entered manually with the
arrow keys.
Only valid addresses (< 255) are accepted.
Current alert Service menu

destination: CONFIGURE
010.006.005.152 Alert System

change digit:   :cancel
change position:   :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 143
4.6.3.3 Send Test Alert
The function sends a predefined test e-mail to the configured alert mail destination.

2 Alert destination Configure
3 Send test alert Alert system

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 144
A successful delivery is confirmed with a message and a double beep:
Sending test alert to Service menu

Configure
Alert system
192.9.200.250 
Email successfully sent :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 145


Repair and Service
In case the destination is not reachable the following message appears with a long
beep:
Sending test alert to Service menu

Configure
Alert system
192.9.200.250 
Email delivery failure :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 146
4.6.4 Direct ID
This service menu provides a feature to select from a list either <direct ID off> or
the ID-viewer you want to be connected to.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 147

<direct ID off> Configure
ID-viewer1-192.9.200.202
ID-viewer2-192.9.200.203 
ID-viewer3-192.9.200.204 :cancel
:ok :more

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 148


Repair and Service
4.6.5 Add-on Applications
This service menu provides a feature to enable/disable add-on applications for the
Digitizer.
A list of possible add-on applications will be offered.

2 User terminal language Configure
3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 149
(1) Select the desired add-on application using the <>-keys.

(2) Press <> to initialize the add-on application.
(3) Press <> to jump back to the prior screen without saving.

1 Mammography (50µm) CONFIGURE
3 FLFS Application

:cancel
:ok | :more

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 150
The second line displays the selected Add-on application.

(4) Enable/disable mentioned add-application with the <> keys.
Status of Service menu

Selected application Configure
Application
enabled 
Change status with : :cancel
:ok | 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 151
(5) Press <> to save changes and exit menu.

(6) Press <> to jump back to the prior screen without saving.


Repair and Service
4.6.6 Service Protection
This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate a protection mechanism of

the service program.
The protection mechanism is implemented to prevent access by unauthorized service
providers. The protection can be activated with an access plus license code. When this
protection mechanism is activated, access to the service program is only possible with
the access code.
The protection mechanism is switched off by default (factory setting). Hence it first
needs to be activated before it can be utilized.
through standard service password from Agfa (refer to section 3.2.1).

3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 152
NOTE:
Obtain the access code, license code (and deactivation code if required) for your
individual device from the Local Agfa Service Organization:
 Access code and license code have an expiration date configured by Local Agfa
Service Organization.
 Once the protection mechanism is activated, enter access code only to get
access to the service menu.
 When entered the service menu, you will not be asked for login to the service
menu for the next 16 hours.
 If the expiration date is reached, it is possible to login one last time and get
access for the next 16 hours. After that time the device will block itself asking for
new access and license code.


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
The first activation of Service Protection on a device will fail. The web interface will
display the message:
"The size of the serial number is wrong ( == 0) || ( > 20)".
At the local digitizer display no error message is displayed.
(1) Access the menu <Service protection> at the LCD terminal and press
<ok>.
Entering a valid license code is not needed.
(2) Restart the system.
From now on the service protection can be activated or deactivated without
problems.
Activating the Service Protection:

(1) Enter the license code and the access code by means of the <>-keys to
select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the character out of a list (alphabet in capital
letters, numbers 1…9).
(2) Press the <> key to confirm the entered code.
To enable service Service menu

protection please enter: CONFIGURE
Protection
License code: 1____- 
_____-_____-_____-_____ :cancel
Access code: ____ :ok
change digit:   
change position:   SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 153
NOTE:
In case the entered codes are not valid the user is asked to re-enter the respective
codes. After three failed attempts a timeout of 3 minutes is forced before the user gets
access for another try.
Entered code not valid! Service menu

Please re-enter code: CONFIGURE
Protection
License code: 1____- 
_____-_____-_____-_____ :cancel
Access code: 1____ :ok
Figure 154


Repair and Service
The status of the service protection (activated) will be displayed:
The service protection Service menu

is activated. CONFIGURE
This license is valid Protection
till: DD-MMM-YYYY 
Type the access code :ok
<xxxxx> to enter the 
Service mode SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 155
<xxxxx> indicates the currently valid access code.
Deactivating the Service Protection:

(1) Enter the deactivation code by means of the <> keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the character out of a list (alphabet in small
and capital letters, numbers 1…9).
(2) Press the <> key to confirm the entered code.
To disable service Service menu

protection please enter: CONFIGURE
Protection
Deactivation code: 
.____ :cancel
:ok
Figure 156
NOTE:
In case the entered code is not valid the user is asked to re-enter the code.
After three failed attempts a timeout of 3 minutes is forced before the user gets access
for another try.
Entered code not valid! Service menu

Please re-enter code: CONFIGURE
Protection
Deactivation code: 
1____ :cancel
:ok
Figure 157


Repair and Service
The status of the service protection (deactivated) will be displayed:
The service protection Service menu

is deactivated. CONFIGURE
Protection
Type the standard 
password to enter the
Service mode :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 158
4.6.7 Maintenance Notification
This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate the maintenance

notification mechanism and to define the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM)
and the Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM).
If the Maintenance Notification is enabled, the customer will be reminded daily or when
starting the Digitizer when the following is applicable:
 This message appears 6 weeks before the defined maintenance due date or
due cycles are reached:
"Maintenance interval will expire within a short time.
Please contact service."
 This message appears, when the maintenance due date or due cycles are
expired:
"Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."

3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 159


Repair and Service
(1) Depending on the current status: Enable or disable the maintenance notification
mechanism using the <>--keys.
Maintenance notification Service menu

Current status: CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
enabled 
Change status with : :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 160
If required adapt the target values for "Operating hours" and "Cycles" according to the
local terms of the service agreement:
(2) Enter the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM)
by means of the <>-keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the number out of a list (numbers 0…9).
Default: 12.000 cycles
(3) Press the <> key to confirm the entered value.
Define the Mean Cycle Service menu

Between Maintenance: CONFIGURE
(default 12.000 cycles) PM Indicator

MCBM: 20.000 :cancel
change position:   
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 161
(4) Enter the Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM)

by means of the <>-keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the number out of a list (numbers 0…9).
Default: 12 months
(5) Press the <> key to confirm the entered value.
Define the Mean Time Service menu

Between Maintenance: CONFIGURE
(default 12 months) PM Indicator

MTBM: 12 months :cancel
change position:   
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 162


Repair and Service
The status of the maintenance notification will be displayed:

is activated. CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
Next scheduled PM: 
The user is notified 6 :ok
weeks before. 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 163
or
is deactivated. CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
The user will not be 
notified for maintenance
required :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 164
4.7 Service Menu: CHECKS
This service menu provides tests to check the Digitizer hardware and the image
transmission to the processing station.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 165


Repair and Service
4.7.1 System Check
The system check is a non interactive test to check the relevant hardware of the
Digitizer like voltages, stepper motor connections, light barrier status, nodes etc.
The test results are listed in a file named C25_<serial#>_syscheck.txt and the
file is saved in the root of the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046_syscheck.txt.
1 System check Service menu

2 Send image Checks

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 166
Service menu
CHECKS
To save the result, System check
insert a storage 
medium. :cancel
Press  to start check. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 167
(2) Press <> to go back to next higher level (service menu).

(3) Press <> to start the system check.
Service menu
CHECKS
System check running. System check
Please wait ... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 168


Repair and Service
4.7.2 Send Image
This service menu provides a feature to send images, stored on the harddisk of the
Digitizer to the processing station.
A list of possible test images will be offered.
1 System check Service menu

2 Send image Checks

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 169
(1) Press <> to go back to next higher level (service menu).

(2) Press <> to go to the selection list.
1 Test image (mosaic) Service menu

2 Flatfield calibration CHECKS
3 Flatfield banding Send image
4 Test sheet (jitter) 
5 Blue LED test image :cancel
6 Mammo test image 1 :ok
7 Mammo test image 2 
8 Extremity test image SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 170
(1) Use the <>-keys to select the required test image out of the list.
(2) Press <> to send the selected test image to the processing station.
(3) Press <> to go back to next higher level (checks).


Repair and Service
DD+DIS071.04E Troubleshooting
Chapter 3.3
List of contents
1 General Procedure ................................................... 1

1.1 Show Error ............................................................................... 2
1.2 Checks...................................................................................... 3

Repair and Service
1 General Procedure
Error occurrs
Error code is
displayed
Select
<Show Error>
Function
see 1.1
Select
<System Check>
see 1.2
Error is located
Corrective
Measures
5155_reg3.3_001.cdr
Additionally:
• Check Infocounter: see Chapter 9, Maintenance, "How to evaluate the
infocounter"
• Evaluate diagnostic images for deficiencies (e.g. jitter)

Repair and Service
Troubleshooting DD+DIS071.04E
1.1 Show Error
(1) Enter the Service menu
(2) Select
4 Show error
1 Explain error code
(3) Select in error code history Code Occurred last Service menu
corresponding entry Show error
22570 04-Feb-99 15:45
20605 09-Jan-99 11:32 : cancel
: ok
5155_reg3.3_002.cdr
Figure 1
(4) Reason, meaning and cure of error 22570 detected Service menu
are listed Show error
Explain code
Reason: Cassette module
1. Power supply test of : cancel
stepper node roll
failed : scroll
Meaning: No Power supply
on stepper node
5155_reg3.3_003.cdr
Figure 2
22570 detected Service menu

Show error
- Power supply not Explain code
connected : cancel
- Fuse blown
- Power supply : scroll
defective
5155_reg3.3_004.cdr
Figure 3
(5) Carry out the checks listed at cure. 22570 detected Service menu
Show error
Explain code
To verify that error is not sporadic, Cure: - Check cables
and connectors : cancel
also a quick check can be carried - Check replace fuse
out. - Check replace power
supply
: scroll
5155_reg3.3_005.cdr
Figure 4

Repair and Service
1.2 Checks
(2) Select Service menu

8 Checks 1 System check Checks
2 Check laser
1 System check 3 Check destinations
: cancel
4 Check disk : ok
5 Send flatfield
6 Send jitter pattern
7 Check I/O-bus
8 Send Mammo Testimage
5156_reg3.3_006.cdr
Figure 5
(3) System check is starting.
All actions are executed in same
order as during normal
operation.
(4) The file Snapshot.txt is

generated on partition d:\ which
informs you about the status of
the machine.
You can use e.g. notepad to
view it.
As an alternative, you can connect
your Service PC to the serial port
and enter "diag" at the prompt to
start the diagnostic tool.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS399.05E Codings, Fuses, LEDs
Chapter 3.4
List of contents
1 Coding of the Stepper Motor Control Boards ...........................1
2 I/O-Bus Addresses of Boards .....................................................2
3 Jumper Configuration of the Hard Disk .....................................2

3.1 SCSI Hard disk ................................................................................................ 2
4 Fuses Overview ............................................................................3
5 Overview of Diagnostic LEDs .....................................................3

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Repair and Service
1 Coding of the Stepper Motor Control Boards

GS IOB-SIN-STEP Boards:
CM+9 9499 8140 x
GS Designation IO-Bus Switch Jumper Settings

Address
410 Scan Unit – 37H JL1 JL1
Scan rolls lift 1 8

board JLGS410.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
412 Scan Unit – 36H JL1 JL1
Slowscan board 1 8
JLGS412.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
602 IP Transport Unit 27H JL1 JL1
– IP transport 1 8
board JLGS602.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
712 Cassette Unit – IP 26H JL1 JL1
alignment board 1 8
JLGS712.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
GS IOB-SIN-5Step Board:
CM+9 9499 8120 x
GS Designation IO-Bus Switch Jumper Settings

Address
710 Cassette Unit – 22H JL1 JL1
5fold-stepper 1 8
motor board JLGS710_1.cdr
21H JL 2 JL2
8 1
JLGS710_2.cdr

Repair and Service
Codings, Fuses, LEDs DD+DIS399.05E
2 I/O-Bus Addresses of Boards
IO-Bus GS Board
Address
21 710 Cassette unit (JL2) – 5fold stepper motor board
22 710 Cassette unit (JL1) – 5fold stepper motor board
26 712 Cassette unit – IP alignment board
27 602 IP Transport Unit – IP transport board
36 412 Scan Unit – Slowscan board
37 410 Scan Unit – Scan rolls lift board
70 230 Power integration board
75 210 Erasure control board
85 116 Emergency-node
80 360 cPCI adapter board
3 Jumper Configuration of the Hard Disk

3.1 SCSI Hard disk
Two equally designed SCSI hard disks are used. They only differ in the
configuration of their jumper settings.
SCSI-hard disk Quantum Atlas IV, V, Remove all jumpers

10KII
SCSI-hard disk IBM Ultrastar

(DDYS-T09170, IC35L009UWD)
correct jumper configuration

at jumper 6 jumper block:

Repair and Service
4 Fuses Overview
Ass. Location Fuse Quality protects…

200 Power unit SI 201 T 2.0A GS300
200 Stepper motor transformer SI202 T 2.0A TR206
200 Power integration board SI 1 T 2.5A GS410
SI 2 T 2.5A GS602
SI 3 T 2.5A GS712
SI 4 T 2.5A GS412
SI 5 T 6.25A GS710
All fuses are slowblow fuses.
5 Overview of Diagnostic LEDs
Ass. Location LED Indicates

200 Power integration board D9, green SI 4 is OK.
D9, yellow SI 3 is OK.
D9, red SI 5 is OK.
D10, green SI 2 is OK.
D10, yellow SI 1 is OK.
D10, red +5 V voltage is OK.
D11, green (not used)
D11, yellow (not used)
D11, red +24 V voltage is OK.
300 cPCI Rack GS306, The voltage at
voltage indicators corresponding
(3 x 3 LEDs) position (see
labeling) is OK.
GS312, Indicate the signaling
Ethernet and related to software
FPGA indicators (service connector
(2 x 3 LEDs) side) and hardware
(RESET switch side).

Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105
This document describes replacements and repair procedures for the digitizer.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.1:
2.2 03-2013  Added information about c-Revive Board, S-Revive
Board and SATA Hard Disk
 Added reference to enclosure for spare part
“c-Revive Board”
 Added reference to enclosure for spare part
“Floppy Disk Drive”
 Added information about return procedure in section 1

eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v06
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Replacements / Repair Procedures
Document Title
Service Bulletin CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
Enclosure Installation Instructions for c-Revive Board, DD+DIS217.12E
Enclosure Replacement instructions for Floppy Disk Drive,
DD+DIS222.09E
Service Bulletin CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 02 - New vacuum pumps for
installations higher than 2000m above sea level ... ,
DD+DIS276.07E
Service Bulletin Availability of First Repaired Spare Parts for Imaging
Products, Return of Defective Parts necessary,
DD+DIS050.12E


03-2013 CR 25.0 - Type 5156/100/105 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................6
1.1 Installation of machine-specific Parameters .............................................................................6
1.2 Returning defective Parts..........................................................................................................7
2 SAFETY NOTES ......................................................................................................................9

3 REMOVAL OF PANELS .........................................................................................................10
4 REPLACEMENTS AT THE TRANSPORT UNIT ....................................................................11
4.1 Removing the Transport Unit from Digitizer............................................................................11
4.2 Replacing the Vacuum Unit ....................................................................................................12
4.3 Replacing the Suction Cups....................................................................................................14
4.4 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board .......................................................................................15
4.5 Remounting the Transport Unit...............................................................................................16
5 REPLACEMENTS AT THE ERASURE UNIT.........................................................................17

5.1 Removing the Erasure Unit from the Digitizer ........................................................................17
5.2 Replacing the Erasure Lamps.................................................................................................18
5.3 Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer .....................................................................................19
6 REPLACEMENTS AT THE POWER UNIT.............................................................................20

6.1 Removing the Power Unit from the Digitizer...........................................................................20
6.2 Removing the Power Integration Board..................................................................................23
6.3 Installing the new Power Integration Board ............................................................................24
6.4 Removing the 24 V Power Supply ..........................................................................................26
6.5 Replacing the Erasure Control Board .....................................................................................28
7 REPLACEMENTS AT THE CASSETTE UNIT .......................................................................30

7.1 Removing the Cassette Unit from the Digitizer.......................................................................30
7.2 Replacing the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board .............................................................................34
7.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board .......................................................................................35
7.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Mechanism ..........................................................................37
8 REPLACEMENTS AT THE SCAN UNIT ................................................................................42

8.1 Safety Note .............................................................................................................................42
8.2 Replacing the Optic Module....................................................................................................43


Repair and Service
8.3 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation ............................................................................46
8.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector.........................................47
8.5 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation..........................................................................50
8.6 Removing the Scan Unit from the Digitizer.............................................................................51
8.7 Replacing the Pin Diode Board...............................................................................................57
9 REPLACEMENTS AT THE CPCI-RACK (UP TO CR 35-X SN < 4000; CR 25.0 SN < 6500)61
9.1 Replacing the cPCI-Rack by the Revive-Rack .......................................................................61
9.2 Replacing the SCSI Hard Disk in the Module “Storage complete” .........................................63
9.3 Replacing the Floppy Disk Drive in the Module “Storage complete” ......................................66
9.4 Replacing the Power Supply at the cPCI-Rack ......................................................................66
9.5 Replacing the Oberon Board by the c-Revive-Board .............................................................68
9.6 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the c-Revive-Board...........................................................69
10 REPLACEMENTS AT THE REVIVE RACK (AS OF CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR 25.0 SN ≥

6500).......................................................................................................................................73
10.1 Replacing the Revive Rack.....................................................................................................73
10.2 Replacing the Revive Board or S-Revive Board.....................................................................75
10.3 Replacing the IDE Hard Disk and/or the Cables at the Revive Board....................................77
10.4 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the S-Revive Board ..........................................................80
10.5 Replacing the Power Supply at the Revive Rack ...................................................................84
10.6 Replacing the Fans at the Revive Rack..................................................................................85
11 REPLACEMENTS AT THE FRAME .......................................................................................87

11.1 Replacing the Display .............................................................................................................87
11.2 Replacing the Emergency Node Board ..................................................................................89
11.3 Replacing the Erasure Unit Fan..............................................................................................90
11.3.1 Removing Erasure Unit Fan....................................................................................................90
11.3.2 Installing new Erasure Unit Fan ..............................................................................................93


Repair and Service
1 Introduction
This section contains generic information for repair procedures. There is the usage of
machine-specific parameters described and also the return procedure of defective
parts.
1.1 Installation of machine-specific Parameters
CR 35-X 5158/100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/100/105 make use of parts employing
machine-specific parameters.
These are:
 Optic module, see section 8.2
 Photomultiplier module with light collector, see section 8.4
 Scan unit complete, see section 8.6
 Pin-Diodes, see section 8.7
The corresponding spare parts kits comprise the new spare part as well as a storage
medium (e.g. floppy disks or USB Flash drive) containing module specific data. The
storage medium is assigned clearly to the spare part and cannot be mistaken. After the
new part has been installed, you have to install these parameters from the attached
storage medium via service menu of the user terminal. Finally, you are asked to renew
the backup. (See detailed description in the replacement section of this chapter.)
Together with date and counter stamp the serial number of the exchanged part is
automatically registered in the info counter file under the item “hardware modification
history”.


Repair and Service
1.2 Returning defective Parts
Some spare parts are available as new spare parts (CM+) and as repaired spare parts
(RF+). Repaired spare parts can be identified in the spare parts list by the prefix RF+.
In order to make parts available to the repair facility, defective parts have to be
returned to Agfa HealthCare after the replacement based on the current return process.
NOTE:
For detailed information refer to Service Bulletin “Availability of First Repaired Spare
Parts for Imaging Products, Return of Defective Parts necessary”, DD+DIS050.12E.
(1) Check for all parts removed from a device if they can be returned:
A defective part can be returned for repair if the packaging of the equivalent
spare part carries the label “EXCHANGE PART” or “Return part!” (see figure 1
and 2).
(2) Always return the part if a return label is attached.
Figure 1: Old red label Figure 2: New red label.


Repair and Service
(3) Fill out the return label completely.
IMPORTANT:
For correct handling of the returned
part it is necessary that all fields are
filled out completely.
Figure 3: Example for a return label
(4) Use the packaging of the new spare part to return the defective parts. All
transport locks, padding or antistatic bags must be used to avoid further damage
during transport.


Repair and Service
2 Safety Notes
Observe for all service interventions the following Safety Notes:
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect the machine from the mains before performing
any service interventions at the digitizer.
Safety instructions for electronical parts see Chapter 3.1 and Generic Safety Directions
for HealthCare and Imaging Products.
CAUTION:
Danger of cutting!
Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged.
Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed.
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0)
around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting
metal piece.


Repair and Service
3 Removal of Panels
1
2
4 3
4
Figure 4
1 Cover: Open two screws (Philips screw driver, medium size) and remove cover.
2 Left Side Panel: Open two screws (screw driver, medium size) and lift side panel
off.
3 Right side panel: Press two latches and lift side panel off.
4 Top Front Panel: Loosen six Phillips screws and lift front panel off (the cover has
to be removed before).
5 Bottom Front Panel: Press two latches to open the door.


Repair and Service
4 Replacements at the Transport Unit
4.1 Removing the Transport Unit from Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 5 minutes
(1) Unplug digitizer from the mains.

(2) Remove right side panel.
(3) Disconnect plugs (1) and (2).
Figure 5
(4) Unlock the four fasteners (3).

(5) Remove complete transport unit from
digitizer and put it down.
Figure 6


Repair and Service
4.2 Replacing the Vacuum Unit
REQUIRED SPARE PARTS:

 Pump unit spare part number*: CM+9 5155 6130 4
 Only for sites, which are located on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above
sea level:
High Altitude Pump unit spare part number*: CM+9 5158 6130 1
(for more information see DD+DIS276.07E, Service Bulletin No.02 of CR 35X)
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench (5.5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To prevent from loosing screws in the

digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug two hoses, including plastic
angles, from suction cups (1).
(3) Unplug 4-pin and 5-pin plugs.
(4) Unscrew three screws (2) to loosen
vacuum unit
Figure 7


Repair and Service
(5) Take out complete vacuum unit.
Figure 8
(6) Check if there are dust caps on the

new spare part and remove all of
them.
Figure 9
(7) Install new vacuum unit in reverse order.

(8) Be aware of guide slot at suctions cups, to plug plastic angles in correct position.


Repair and Service
4.3 Replacing the Suction Cups

Suction cups spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9240 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To prevent from loosing screws in the

digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug hose, including plastic angle,
from metal bolt of suction cup.
(3) Unscrew mounting screw.
(4) Turn metal bolt of suction cup about
90° by hand and take out suction cup.
(5) Install new suction cup in reverse
order.
Figure 10


Repair and Service
4.4 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board

Stepper motor board (transport unit) spare part number*: CM+9515881500
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) For replacing stepper motor board,

take out complete transport unit from
digitizer.
(2) Place transport unit stable and
protect against tilting.
(3) Move transport robot upwards.
(4) Unplug both cables.
(5) Remove plastic pins from metal plate
side and remove stepper motor
board.
(6) Take out plastic pins from old stepper
motor board and attach them on the
new one.
Figure 11
(7) Install new stepper motor board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
4.5 Remounting the Transport Unit
NOTE:
Before remounting transport unit in the digitizer check that cassette opener of cassette
unit is in hidden position. Otherwise a conflict with suction cups may appear.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remount transport unit.

(2) Tie the four fasteners.
(3) Plug in the two cables and check that
power supply cable cannot be
clamped with side panel.
Figure 12


Repair and Service
5 Replacements at the Erasure Unit
5.1 Removing the Erasure Unit from the Digitizer

Halogen Lamp spare part number*: CM+9 0450 6553 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 min
(1) Unplug the machine from the mains.

(2) Open front door.
(3) Push lock (1) downwards.
Figure 13


Repair and Service
(4) Pull out erasure unit to have easy

access to the cable.
(5) Unplug cable of erasure unit.
Figure 14
(6) Pull the erasure unit cautiously out

of the rail.
Figure 15
5.2 Replacing the Erasure Lamps
(1) Open the two latches beside the

glass.
(2) Swing up the glass covering the
lamps.
Figure 16


Repair and Service
NOTE:
 Always replace all 10 lamps at the same time!
 Pull the lamps carefully out of their sockets.
 The glass bulb of the new lamps must be clean. Use a soft cloth, do not touch
with bare fingers.
(3) Insert the new lamps carefully in their sockets.

(4) Close glass covering and the two latches.
5.3 Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer
(1) Put erasure unit carefully on the rail and move it into the digitizer.
(2) Connect cable of erasure unit.
NOTE:
When re-inserting erasure unit, make sure that lock engages again.


Repair and Service
6 Replacements at the Power Unit
6.1 Removing the Power Unit from the Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Socket wrench 5,5 mm
 Socket wrench 7 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Switch off digitizer and unplug mains

cable on the rear side.
Figure 17
(2) Open the front door.

(3) Loosen two screws at the frame
(7 mm socket wrench).
Figure 18


Repair and Service
(4) Unplug two cables on right hand side.

(5) Pull out power unit maximum 2 cm
out of the digitizer.
Figure 19
(6) Remove metal plate, see circles

(5.5 mm socket wrench), where four
cable clamps are mounted.
Figure 20
(7) Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(8) Disconnect all plugs.
Figure 21


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(9) Remove power unit carefully from

digitizer.
Figure 22


Repair and Service
6.2 Removing the Power Integration Board

Power integration board spare part number*: CM+9 5156 6450 3
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench 5,5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Loosen three screws (socket wrench

5.5 mm) (1). 1
Figure 23


Repair and Service
(2) Unscrew (1, four screws) and unplug

(2) power supply (A) to get easy
access to plugs of the power 2
integration board.
A
1
Figure 24
(3) Pinch three plastic pins (1) and push

out of metal plate. 1
(4) Unplug five cables of the power
integration board and remove it.
Figure 25
6.3 Installing the new Power Integration Board
NOTE:
Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.
(1) Establish which type of erasure unit fan is installed.
Note: The new fan (spare part number*: CM+9 5146 3620 0) has the type
designation "RG 125-19/14N/2" on its label.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
(2) Set the jumpers on the power integration board depending on the fan type
(see Figure 26).
For the new fan, set jumpers to the upper two pins at ST7 and ST8.
For the old fan, set jumpers to the lower two pins at ST7 and ST8.


Repair and Service
Figure 26
(3) Install new power integration board in reverse order (see sections 6.2 and 6.1).
(4) Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5) Switch on the digitizer and wait for successful completion of the self test.


Repair and Service
6.4 Removing the 24 V Power Supply

Power supply 24V spare part number*: CM+9 5156 9100 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Small screw driver
 socket wrench (5.5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug two cables (1).
Figure 27


Repair and Service
(2) Unscrew two screws at power supply

of the power unit, one at each side
(5.5 mm socket wrench).
(3) Take out power supply.
Figure 28
(1) Install the new power supply in

reverse order.


Repair and Service
6.5 Replacing the Erasure Control Board

Erasure control board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9110 6
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) For replacing erasure control board

take out power unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug connections to transformers.
Figure 29
(3) Unplug three cables at left side.
Figure 30


Repair and Service
(4) Unscrew three screws (1) at metal

plate.
Figure 31
(5) Turn board and unplug cables at right

side.
(6) If new board was delivered without
metal plate, remove this from old
board and mount it to new one.
Figure 32
(1) Install new erasure control board in

reverse order.
Be aware that board is very sensitive
to bending.


Repair and Service
7 Replacements at the Cassette Unit
NOTE:
For all actions at cassette unit, first remove transport unit (see section 4.1).
7.1 Removing the Cassette Unit from the Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Phillips screwdriver
 Socket wrench (7 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Loosen the screws (1) on the rear

side of digitizer.
(2) Push back top cover a little.
(3) Remove both side panels.
Figure 33
(4) Open front door.
Figure 34


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen six screws 1, three at each

side, at front cover.
(6) Remove the front cover.
Figure 35
(7) Disconnect cables of cassette unit.

Two of them can only be reached
from the front.
Figure 36
(8) Loosen screw with a socket wrench

(5.5 mm) to unfasten energy chain
from frame.
Figure 37


Repair and Service
(9) Loosen three screws 1 of spindle

carriage with socket wrench (7 mm)
for about two turns.
Figure 38
(10) Turn spindle carriage off the thread.

Mind that it is a left-handed thread.
Figure 39
(11) Move up IP transport robot by

means of red handle.
Figure 40


Repair and Service
(12) Pull out cassette unit cautiously with

a straight movement, as bearings do
not guide all along. Mind position of
the hands as shown beside.
Put cassette unit down.
Figure 41
(1) Reinstall in reverse order. When reinserting, do not cant bearings and do not
push in with force.


Repair and Service
7.2 Replacing the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board

5-fold stepper motor board spare part number*: CM+9 9499 8130 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug all cables, if necessary

unscrew cable clamps.
(2) Push plastic clips and take board off
the pins.
Be aware that board is very sensitive
to bending.
Figure 42
(1) Install new board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
7.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board

Stepper motor board (cassette unit) spare part number*: CM+9 9499 8140 7
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Socket wrench (5.5 mm)
 Piers
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unscrew energy chain to have free

access to stepper motor board.
(2) Unplug all cables.
Figure 43


Repair and Service
(3) Take board off the plastic pins, if

necessary by means of a pliers.
Figure 44
(1) Install new board in reverse order.

Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.


Repair and Service
7.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Mechanism
NOTE:
If the light barrier flag of the cassette
opener is broken then you need not
replace the complete cassette opener
mechanism.
The light barrier flag is a separately
available spare part. Spare part number*:
CM+9 5146 5911 0.
The light barrier flag can brake when it
touches the frame of cassette opener while
it is moved down.
Figure 45

Cassette opener mechanism spare part number*: CM+9 5156 9050 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Screw driver
 Socket wrench (7 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
(1) For replacing cassette opener mechanism first take out complete cassette unit
from digitizer.
(2) Remove spring washers at both

sides of shaft.
Pay attention that shaft is not
scratched during replacement as it
touches IP directly in normal
operation.
Figure 46
(3) Remove deflector plate by

unscrewing three screws by a
socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 47
Figure 48


Repair and Service
(4) Remove I/O slot opener by

unscrewing two screws by a
socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 49
(5) Remove light barrier mount by

unscrewing two adjoining screws by
a socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 50
(6) Remove black plastic frame of

opener by unscrewing four screws,
two on both sides, by a socket
wrench (7 mm).
Figure 51


Repair and Service
(7) Remove spring washer at right side

of shaft.
(8) Push black plastic crank carefully to
right side. It can be moved by red
handle to loosen contact to shaft.
Figure 52
(9) Remove alignment plate by means

of a Phillips screwdriver.
Figure 53
(10) Turn complete cassette unit and swing up 5fold stepper motor board to have
access to the rear side.
(11) Unplug connector to cassette detection switch (ST 8) at 5fold stepper motor board
of cassette unit.
(12) Unscrew two nuts at rear side which
mount cassette opener.
Figure 54


Repair and Service
(13) Take out toothed belt and remove

cassette opener.
Figure 55
(1) Install new cassette opener in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8 Replacements at the Scan Unit
8.1 Safety Note
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.
There are no serviceable parts inside the

optical module.
Do not open sealed parts of the optical

module.
Figure 56
Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.


Repair and Service
8.2 Replacing the Optic Module

Optic module spare part number*: CM+9 5148 2700 3
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen key (4 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove left side panel.
(2) Unplug activation plug of the optic

module
(Sub-D plug, 25 pins).
5158_reg3.5_001.cdr
Figure 57


Repair and Service
(3) Undo the shielding clamp (A),

(5.5 mm socket wrench).
Unplug the polygon plug (B) (the
connection is unmistakable).
A
5158_reg3.5_002.cdr
Figure 58
(4) For easier handling, unplug flat cable

on left side of PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
Figure 59
(5) Loosen four Allen screws (4 mm).
5158_reg3.5_003.cdr
Figure 60


Repair and Service
(6) Pull out optic module cautiously by

using the T-handle and one hand
down left.
The rails guide the optic module and

avoid that the PMM is being
damaged.
However, take care to pull out the
optic module straightforward.
5158_reg3.5_004.cdr
Figure 61
(1) Install the new optic module in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8.3 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation
(1) Switch on the digitizer.

(2) Install the optic module specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the
Service Menu at the user terminal.
NOTE:
In case that a digitizer with Revive-Rack and USB is used (CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000;
CR 25.0 SN ≥ 6500), copy the floppy disk to a USB memory stick.
(3) Select <5 INSTALL data>*

<4 Optics parameters>.
The system requests:

a. to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the
floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and
counter stamp
b. to update the backup
(4) Perform an IP center calibration (see chapter 3.6 of the service documentation).
(5) Perform a shading calibration of all formats (see chapter 3.6 of the service
documentation).
(6) Update the backup to save the calibration data.
(7) Select <3 SAVE data>*
<2 Machine specific data>
(8) Follow the online instructions.
(9) Enter the serial number of the digitizer on the label of the optic modul floppy disk.
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6 of the service documentation.
* Labelling of menu entries depends on the software version of the digitizer.

In software versions older than ACP_5007 the term "data" is called "floppy".


Repair and Service
8.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector
CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.

Photomultiplier with light collector spare part number*: CM+9 5148 3080 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen key, 3 mm
 Socket wrench, 7 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove the optic module as

described in section 0
(2) Undo the Allen screw (3 mm) at the
light well (right hand side).
(3) Lift up the light well.
5158_reg3.5_005.cdr
Figure 62


Repair and Service
(4) Unplug cable on left side of the

PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
Figure 63
(5) Loosen the two knurled screws by

pressing the blue foam.
5158_reg3.5_007.cdr
Figure 64
(6) Loosen the four Allen screws at the

light collector (7 mm socket wrench)
5158_reg3.5_008.cdr
Figure 65


Repair and Service
(7) Move the black aluminum plate at the

far end of the light collector gently to
and fro; this eases the removal
(8) Tip over and pull out the PMM
carefully.
5158_reg3.5_009.cdr
Figure 66
NOTE:
Hold one hand to the PMM and the other to
the light collector to avoid tearing apart the
module.
5158_reg3.5_010.cdr
Figure 67
(9) Put down the PMM carefully.
(1) Install in reverse order.
NOTE:
Check the functionality of the dust brush after the installation of the PMM!


Repair and Service
8.5 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation
(1) Switch off the digitizer.

(2) Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal.
NOTE:
In case that a digitizer with Revive Rack and USB is used (CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR
25.0 SN ≥ 6500), copy the floppy disk to a USB memory stick.
(3) Select <5 INSTALL data>*

<3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)>
The system requests:

a. to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the
serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the
parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date
and counter stamp
b. to update the backup
(4) Make an IP center calibration, see chapter 3.6.

(5) Make a shading calibration of all formats, see chapter 3.6.
(6) Update the backup to save the calibration data.
(7) Select <3 SAVE data>*
(8) Follow the on-line instructions.
(9) Enter the serial number of the digitizer on the label of the
photomultiplier floppy disk.
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6.
* Labelling of menu entries depends on the software version of the digitizer.

In software versions older than ACP_5007 the term "data" is called "floppy".


Repair and Service
8.6 Removing the Scan Unit from the Digitizer
The following preparations have to be carried out:

 Disconnect mains cable.
 Open front door.
 Remove both side panels as described in section 3.
 Remove IP-transport Unit as described in section 4.1.
 Remove Erasure Unit as described in section 5.1.
 Remove Optical Modul as descriebed in section 8.2.
 Remove the Photomultiplier with light collector 8.4.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Phillips screwdriver
 Allen key (5 mm)
 Open-end wrench (13 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
(1) Tilt the rack forwards.
Figure 68: Example cPCI-Rack
(2) Loosen Allen screw (5 mm); there

may be perceptible resistance due
to Locktite saved connection.
Figure 69
(3) Unscrew two screws (A) (open-end

wrench 13 mm) to loosen scan unit
from frame.
5158_reg3.5_011.cdr
Figure 70


Repair and Service
(4) Pull out scan unit a little.
Figure 71
(5) Remove grounding clamp (socket

wrench 5.5 mm) at the right side of
the boards.
Figure 72
(6) Mark cables before disconnecting.

They could be mistaken.
(7) Disconnect all plugs (1) at both
sides from boards.
Figure 73


Repair and Service
(8) Loosen screw (socket wrench

5.5 mm) and unplug flat cable on
left side of scan unit.
Figure 74
(9) Remove metal plate, see circles

(socket wrench 5.5 mm), where
four cable clamps are mounted.
Figure 75
(10) Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(11) Disconnect all plugs.
Figure 76


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(12) Put cables over the front door to

have easy access to the scan unit.
Figure 77
(13) Push slightly to left side to avoid

getting caught.
(14) Pull out the scan unit a little.
Figure 78


Repair and Service
(15) Push slightly to right side to avoid

canting of the rubber pad in the rail.
Figure 79
(16) To pull out the scan unit completely

use hand hold on the left side.
Figure 80
(17) Bring scan unit on a safe place and

take care that it can not tilt.
(1) Install new scan unit in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8.7 Replacing the Pin Diode Board

Pin Diode board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9090 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Open-end wrench (7 mm, 10 mm)
 Screw driver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug cables at pin diode board.
(2) Mark position (1) of motor. The

mark is necessary to reproduce
belt tension afterwards.
(3) Unscrew two screws (2) by socket
wrench (5.5 mm), positioned under
toothed belt.
Figure 81
(4) Loosen two screws open-end

wrench 10 mm, for moving motor.
Figure 82


Repair and Service
(5) Move motor from right to left and

take away toothed belt. Afterwards
take out complete metal angle with
motor.
Figure 83
(6) Remove spring washers on both

sides of gear.
Figure 84
(7) Unscrew two nuts at upper

mounting open-end wrench 7 mm.
Figure 85


Repair and Service
(8) Move two bearings away from each

other by means of a small screw
driver.
Figure 86
(9) Unscrew c-clips protection at scan roller and remove scan roller carefully.
(10) Take out springs at aluminum

bracket and bracket itself.
Figure 87
(11) Remove worm wheel.

(12) Remove spring washers at both
sides of drive shaft and take out
drive shaft itself by moving
backwards.
Figure 88
(13) Unplug connection to diode.


Repair and Service
(14) Unscrew two screws (socket

wrench 5.5 mm), to dismount metal
bracket.
Figure 89
(15) Move board to left side until it stops.

(16) To take out the board you have to pass two screws on the right side.
Therefore bend board very carefully, turn it into a horizontal position and take it
out.
(1) After reinserting the new pin diode board, make sure that board engages
properly.
(2) Push the board to the very right side, hold it in place and mount the metal
bracket. Check that the board cannot move.
(3) Connect plugs. Only plug for motor is connected later.
(4) Insert drive shaft. Make sure that its ends engage in correct position and that
light barrier flag is in functional position.
(5) Mount aluminum angle and springs.
(6) Mount motor and toothed belt.
(7) Screw loose-fitting two 5.5 mm screws under belt.
(8) Mount motor by two screws with

open-end wrench 10 mm, at
position marked before.
(9) Check and resp. adjust tension of
toothed belt by pressing moderate
with two fingers. Distance should
be approx. 1.5 cm (0.6 inch).
(10) Fix screws under belt.
Figure 90
(11) Wind cable around feed line of motor and connect plug of light barrier to motor.


Repair and Service
9 Replacements at the cPCI-Rack

(up to CR 35-X SN < 4000; CR 25.0 SN < 6500)
9.1 Replacing the cPCI-Rack by the Revive-Rack

 Revive Rack (including fan) spare part number*: CM+9 5158 1710 0
When the cPCI-Rack is replaced by the Revive-Rack, the following spare part is
additionally required:
 S-Revive Board spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1800 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 min.
(1) Before installation perform a digitizer A

backup (because a virgin hard disk
will be installed).
(2) Open the side panel on the right side.
The cPCI-Rack is placed at the
bottom of the digitizer.
(3) Tilt the cPCI-Rack forwards.
(4) Diconnect the grey cable on the left
side of the rack (A).
(5) Disconnect all cables at the boards.
(6) Pull the cPCI-Rack carefully out of
the tilt mechnism.
(7) Unmount the power supply (see Figure 91
section 9.4).
It will be re-used in the Revive Rack.


Repair and Service
(1) Mount the power supply into the

Revive Rack as described in section
10.5.
(2) Mount the new S-Revive Board as
described in section 10.2.
(3) Insert the Revive Rack (with fan,
power supply, and S-Revive Board)
into the tilt mechanism.
(4) Connect the grey cable to the
external right side of the Revive Rack
(see Figure 91).
(5) Connect all cables at the S-Revive Figure 92
Board.
(6) Close the the side panel.
NOTE:
For installation instructions of the software on a virgin hard disk refer to the enclosure
delivered with the software. The software can be downloaded from:
Agfa HealthCare Library > Computed Radiography > CR Digitizer >
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the S-Revive Board.
(7) Install the latest digitizer software.

(8) Restore the machine specifc data.
Verification Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.


Repair and Service
9.2 Replacing the SCSI Hard Disk in the Module “Storage complete”
NOTE:
 In order to avoid any damage at the storage board, replace the hard disk very
cautiously.
 Always use the Antistatic wrist strap when working inside the digitizer.

SCSI Hard Disk spare part number*: CM+9 0486 1354 0
NOTE:
For availability of Spare Parts refer to:
CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and S-Revive Board available as
Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Phillips screwdriver, medium size
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk

perform a digitizer backup
(because a virgin hard disk will be
installed).
(2) Open the right side panel.
The cPCI-Rack with the module
“Storage complete” is placed at the
Figure 93


Repair and Service
(4) Disconnect the white connector of

the power supply from the storage
board (A).
(5) Loosen the two terminal rails (B).
(6) Disconnect the ribbon cables (C) B
and (D) from floppy disk drive and
C
hard disk.
B
D
Figure 94
(7) Figure 95 shows the storage board

with the inserted hard disk.
Figure 95
(8) Loosen four round-head screws at

the rear of the storage board to
separate the hard disk from the
storage board.
Figure 96


Repair and Service
(9) Disconnect the connector of the

power supply (circle) from the hard
disk.
(10) Remove the hard disk from the
storage board.
Figure 97
(1) Install the new hard disk in reverse order.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3007.


Repair and Service
9.3 Replacing the Floppy Disk Drive in the Module “Storage complete”
The replacement instructions DD+DIS222.09E for the Floppy Disk Drive, are enclosed
to the spare part.

Floppy Disk Drive spare part kit spare part number*: CM+9 0486 1365 1
9.4 Replacing the Power Supply at the cPCI-Rack

Power supply spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1850 1
The power supply is used for the cPCI-Rack and for the Revive Rack.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
Removal:
(1) Open the right side panel. A
The cPCI-Rack with power supply
(A) is placed at the bottom of the
digitizer.
Figure 98


Repair and Service
(3) Loosen the 4 screws (see red circles).
NOTE:
The 4 Allen screws delivered with the spare
Figure 99: Example
part power supply can be used alternatively
(4) Pull out the power supply cautiously.
(1) Insert the new power supply.

(2) Fasten the 4 screws.
(3) Close the right side panel.
Verification: Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.


Repair and Service
9.5 Replacing the Oberon Board by the c-Revive-Board
The replacement instructions

DD+DIS217.12E for the c-Revive-Board
are enclosed to the spare part.

c-Revive-Board (including SATA Hard
Disk) spare part number*:
CM+6062840
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 100: c-Revive Board (front and side view)
NOTE:
CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 -
c-Revive Board and S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
NOTE:
The module “Storage complete”, which includes the floppy disk drive and the
SCSI hard disk can remain in the cPCI-Rack when installing the c-Revive Board.


Repair and Service
9.6 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the c-Revive-Board

SATA Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+6062850
is delivered.
Figure 101: SATA Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 20 minutes (including software installation)
NOTE:
 In order to avoid any damage at the board, replace the hard disk very cautiously.

perform a digitizer backup
(because a virgin hard disk will be
installed).
The cPCI-Rack with the c-Revive-
Board is placed at the bottom of
the digitizer.
Figure 102
(4) Unplug all cables at the c-Revive-
Board.


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen the screws at the 2 clips.

(6) Pull out the c-Revive-Board very
carefully.
Figure 103
(7) Disconnect the 2 cables (Power-

and SATA-cable, see yellow circle
in Figure 104).
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always
pull the plug.
Figure 104
(8) Loosen the 4 screws at the holder

(see red circles in Figure 105).
(9) Pull the defective hard disk
carefully out of the holder.
(1) Insert the new hard disk

carefully into the holder.
(2) Fasten the hard disk with the
4 screws.
(3) Connect the 2 cables (Power- and
SATA-cable, see Figure 104).
Figure 105


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging digitizer components!
When installing the c-Revive-Board, make sure it is not canted or mounted in
wrong way.
Otherwise damage to the components on the rear side of the c-Revive-Board
can occur.
(4) Insert the c-Revive-Board carefully

into the guide rail in the middle (see
Figure 106).
and
observe that the connectors are
positioned exactly as shown
in Figure 107.
Figure 106
(5) Slide the c-Revive-Board into the

slot.
(6) Tighten the screws at the 2 clips.
Figure 107


Repair and Service
(7) Connect the cables.

It is recommended to connect the cables in the following order:
a. Laser Diode Module cable
b. IO-Bus cable
f b
SPEED LINK SERVICE d c IO BUS
h g e a
RF-READER RJ45 100Mb POLYGON USB LCD LD-MODULE
PMT
Polygon LCD
Figure 108
CAUTION:
Incorrect plug in of connectors may result in damage of pins.
Insert the connectors c and d with the flattened part as shown in
Figure 108:
c. User terminal (LCD) cable

d. Polygon cable
e. RF-Reader cable
f. Service Interface (RS232) cable
g. Ethernet cable
h. Photomultiplier Tube cable
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the SATA hard disk.


Repair and Service
10 Replacements at the Revive Rack

(as of CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR 25.0 SN ≥ 6500)
NOTE:
The Revive Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of ≥ 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN ≥ 4000
10.1 Replacing the Revive Rack

Revive Rack (including fan) spare part number*: CM+9 5158 1710 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Open the right side panel. A

The Revive Rack is placed at the
(2) Tilt the Revive Rack forwards.
(3) Diconnect the grey cable on the left
external side of the Revive Rack (A).
(4) Disconnect all cables at the Revive
Board/S-Revive Board.
(5) Pull the Revive Rack carefully out of
the tilt mechanism.
Figure 109


Repair and Service
(6) Remove the power supply (see

section 10.5). It will be re-used.
(7) Remove the Revive Board/S-Revive
Board (see section 10.2).
It will be re-used.
(1) Remount the power supply in the

new Revive Rack as described in
section 10.5.
(2) Remount the Revive Board/S-Revive
Board in the new Revive Rack as
described in section 10.2.
(3) Insert the new Revive Rack (with
power supply and Revive Board/S-
Revive Board) into the tilt
mechanism.
(4) Connect the grey cable to the
external right side of the new Revive Figure 110
Rack (see Figure 109).
(5) Connect all cables.


Repair and Service
10.2 Replacing the Revive Board or S-Revive Board

S-Revive Board (including SATA Hard
Disk) spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1800 2
is delivered.
Figure 111: S-Revive Board (front and side view)
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service

perform a digitizer backup (because
a virgin hard disk will be installed). A

The Revive Rack with the Revive
Board/S-Revive Board (A) is placed
at the bottom of the digitizer.
(4) Unplug all cables at the Revive Figure 112

Board.
(5) Loose the 4 screws (see red circles in
Figure 112).
NOTE:
It is sufficient to loosen the screws. It is not necessary to remove them completely.
(6) Pull out the defective Revive Board/S-Revive Board cautiously.
(1) Plug the new S-Revive Board into the rack of the digitizer.
(2) Fasten the 4 screws (see red circles in Figure 112).
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the new S-Revive Board.



Repair and Service
10.3 Replacing the IDE Hard Disk and/or the Cables at the Revive Board

 IDE Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+9 0486 1428 0
 Cable set spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1490 0
(only if cable defective)
is delivered.
Figure 113: IDE Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk perform a digitizer backup (because a virgin
hard disk will be installed).
(2) Unmount the Revive Board as described in section 10.2.


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the 2 cables (Power- and

IDE-cable, see circles in Figure 114).
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always pull the
plug.
(4) Loose the 4 screws (see red circles in Figure 114

Figure 115).
(5) Pull the defective hard disk carefully
out of the rack.
NOTE:
Pull the hard disk in opposite direction of
the board connections. Be carefull with the
cables, they should not get stuck on the
revive board.
Figure 115
(6) Disconnect the Power- and the IDE-

cable (see circles in Figure 116) from
the defective hard disk.
Figure 116
(1) Replace a defective cable if applicable.

(2) Connect the Power-cable and the IDE-cable at the new hard disk.
(3) Insert the new IDE hard disk into the Revive Board.
NOTE:
Push it in opposite direction of the board connections. Be carefull with the cables, they
should not get stuck on the revive board.


Repair and Service
(4) Connect Power- and IDE-cable of the hard disk with the Revive Board
(see Figure 116 ).
(5) Fix the hard disk by fastening the 4 screws (see Figure 115).
(6) Mount the Revive Board as described in section 10.2.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3007.



Repair and Service
10.4 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the S-Revive Board

SATA Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+6062850
(including cable set)
is delivered.
Figure 117: SATA Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 20 minutes (including installation)
NOTE:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk perform a digitizer backup (because a virgin
hard disk will be installed).
(2) Unmount the S-Revive Board as described in section 10.2.


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the Power-cable and

SATA-cable at the SATA hard disk.
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always pull the
plug.
Figure 118
(4) Loosen the 4 screws (see red circles

in Figure 119)
and prevent the the hard disk from
falling down by supporting it with one
hand.
NOTE:
The SATA hard disk is mounted in a holder
and needs to be turned 90 degrees inside
the S-Revive-Board before it can be
removed from the S-Revive-Board.
Figure 119
(5) It is recommended to flip the

complete S-Revive-Board carefully,
still supporting the hard disk with one
hand.
The hard disk with the holder (B) is
now lying on the cover plate.
(6) Turn the holder with the hard disk B
90 degrees.
Figure 120


Repair and Service
(7) Pull the the holder with the hard disk

carefully out of the board.
Figure 121
(8) Loosen the 4 screws at the holder.

(9) Remove the defective SATA hard
disk.
(1) Insert the new SATA hard disk in the

holder.
CAUTION:
Risk of Damage!
Re-use the 4 holder screws. Longer screws
Figure 122
may damage the hard disk.
(2) Fix the SATA hard disk with the

4 screws in the holder.
(3) Insert the holder with new SATA

hard disk completely into the
S-Revive Board.
Figure 123


Repair and Service
(4) Turn the holder with the hard disk

90 degrees
Figure 124
(5) Flip the complete S-Revive-Board

carefully, by supporting the hard disk
with one hand.
(6) Press the hard disk upward
manually to the cover plate of the
S-Revive Board.
Figure 125
(7) Fix the hard disk holder by fastening the 4 screws (see Figure 119).
(8) Connect the Power- and the SATA-cable at the new hard disk (see Figure 118).
(9) Plug the S-Revive Board into the Revive Rack of the digitizer.
(10) Mount the S-Revive Board as described in section 10.2.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the SATA hard disk.



Repair and Service
10.5 Replacing the Power Supply at the Revive Rack

Power supply spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1850 1
The power supply is used for the cPCI-Rack and for the Revive Rack.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:

The Revive Rack with power supply
(A) is placed at the bottom of the A
digitizer.
Figure 126
(3) Loosen the 4 screws (see red

circles).
NOTE:
Figure 127: Example
The 4 Allen screws delivered with the spare
part power supply can be used
alternatively.
(4) Pull out the power supply cautiously.


Repair and Service
(1) Mount the new power supply.

(2) Fasten the 4 screws.
Verification: Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.
10.6 Replacing the Fans at the Revive Rack

Fan bracket (two fans mounted on
bracket) spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1760 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates
the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare
part is delivered.
Figure 128
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:

The Revive Rack with the fans (A) is
placed at the bottom of the digitizer.
A
Figure 129


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the power cable of the

fan by pressing the connector (B)
together.
B
(4) Loose the 2 screws of
the bracket (C). The screws must not
be removed completly.
(5) Take the bracket with fans out of the
digitizer.
Figure 130
(1) Mount the new bracket with fans.

(2) Fasten the 2 screws of the bracket.
(3) Connect the power cable.
Verification Switch on the digitizer. The fan must rotate easily.


Repair and Service
11 Replacements at the Frame
11.1 Replacing the Display

Display spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1620 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Philips screw driver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove cover.

(2) Remove top front panel.
(3) Unscrew four screws
(5.5 mm).
Figure 131


Repair and Service
(4) Loosen screw (5.5 mm) at the right

side of the display.
(5) Unplug cable on the board.
Figure 132
(1) Install the new display in reverse order.


Repair and Service
11.2 Replacing the Emergency Node Board

Emergency Node board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 4820 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Pliers
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove cover.

(2) Remove top front panel.
(3) Take board off the four plastic pins
(1), if necessary by means of pliers.
(4) Unplug flat cable (2).
Figure 133
(1) Install the new emergency node board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
11.3 Replacing the Erasure Unit Fan

Erasure Unit Fan spare part number*: CM+9 5146 3620 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen screw driver (5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
11.3.1 Removing Erasure Unit Fan
(1) Switch off digitizer and disconnect mains plug.

(2) Open lower front door and remove both side panels.
(3) Remove transport unit from digitizer (see section 4.1).
Figure 134: Example cPCI-Rack


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen Allen (5 mm) screw at front

side; there may be perceptible
resistance due to Locktite-saved
connection.
figure 135
(6) Unscrew two Allen screws (5 mm)

(1, see Figure 136) at left side to
loosen scan unit from frame.
(7) Pull out scan unit by about 10 cm.
Figure 136
(8) Remove screw (1, see Figure 137)

which fixes fan assembly (A) at right
side.
(9) Unplug fan assembly at left side.
A
Figure 137


Repair and Service
(10) Slide fan assembly (A) out of holder

(1, see Figure 138) and remove from
device. A
Figure 138
(11) Unscrew 4 Allen screws (1) and

unmount plug (2) to release fan. 2
1
Figure 139


Repair and Service
11.3.2 Installing new Erasure Unit Fan
NOTE:
This erasure unit fan can only be used in combination with the power integration board
with jumpers (Spare part number*: CM+9 5156 6450 3).
(1) Check if the power integration board with jumpers (Spare part number*:
CM+9 5156 6450 3) is installed.
(For the removal of the board from the digitizer, see section 6.2).
NOTE:
The jumpers (see Figure 140) must be set to the upper pins.
Figure 140
(2) Check the jumper settings on the power integration board.

(3) Proceed in reverse order to install new fan.
See section 11.3.
(4) Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5) Switch on and wait for the successful completion of the self test.


Repair and Service
DD+DIS071.04E Adjustments and Calibration
Chapter 3.6
List of contents
1 Overview of possible Adjustments.......................... 1
2 Mechanical Adjustments .......................................... 2

2.1 Adjustment of Scanner Position ............................................ 2
2.1.1 Adjustment Procedure......................................................................... 2
3 Optical Adjustments ................................................. 5
3.1 Shading Calibration................................................................. 5
3.1.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration ..................................................... 5
3.1.2 Preparation of Calibration Procedures ................................................ 6
3.1.3 Exposure of the Cassette.................................................................... 6
3.2 IP-Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)....................... 7
3.2.1 Start IP Center Calibration .................................................................. 7
3.2.2 Possible Results of the IP Center Calibration ..................................... 7
3.3 Shading Calibration................................................................. 8
3.3.1 Start Shading Calibration Procedure................................................... 8
3.3.2 Possible Results of the Shading Calibration ....................................... 8
4 Checking the Image Quality ................................... 12
5 Backup ..................................................................... 12

Repair and Service
1 Overview of possible Adjustments
Adjustments
mechanical optical
see 2 see 3
Scanner Position Shading

see 2.1 Calibration
see 3.1
IP-Center
Calibration
see 3.2
5156_reg3.6_001.cdr

Repair and Service
Adjustments and Calibration DD+DIS071.04E
2 Mechanical Adjustments
2.1 Adjustment of Scanner Position
The following is a critical adjustment! Do only carry out if you are used to this
procedure. Please contact HE/IMG-GSO before starting this procedure.
An adjustment of the scanner position is necessary in cases of changed

geometric or material properties of the clamping elements in general. This
may cause frequent IP jams in the scan unit.
Carry out this adjustment only with digitizers showing this problem frequently!
2.1.1 Adjustment Procedure
(1) Prepare
15 x 30 cm cassette or
18 x 24 cm cassette with an IP
inside
(2) Remove both side panels and

bridge the interlock switch with
service key
(3) Switch on the digitizer
(4) For adjusting the scanner the

fastening at the left side of the
digitizer has to be modified (see
circle in Figure 1 and Figure 2)
Figure 1

Repair and Service
Figure 2
(5) Mark with a permanent marker
or a scriber the fastening nut
and the fastening plate.
The mark makes it easier to

count the turns of the nut.
Figure 3
(6) Turn the marked nut with an
open-end wrench 13 mm
(0.51 inch) one complete turn
counterclockwise.
The scanner tilts to the left side,

with view from the input slot.
Figure 4
(7) Retighten the nut behind the
fastening plate, mounted on the
thread of the clamper.
Figure 5
(8) Enter Service Menu
2 Maintenance
2 Cycle without scan

Repair and Service
(9) Set number of cycles to 1 and

start test cycle with prepared
cassette (15 x 30 cm or 18 x 24
cm).
(10) Is the IP transported and sucked

correctly, repeat steps (6) to (9)
as long as the IP is no more
sucked or transported into the
cassette.
(11) When IP is no longer sucked or

only partly sucked, switch off the
digitizer.
(12) Loosen the nut behind the

fastening plate, mounted on the
thread of the clamper and turn
the marked nut one complete
turn clockwise.
(13) Remove IP by hand, reset the

digitizer and start again a test
cycle.
(14) Is the IP transportation working

correctly, turn the marked nut
again one complete turn
clockwise. Tighten the nut
behind the fastening plate.
(15) Carry out a test cycle with all

cassette formats available on
site.
(16) After adjustment is finished

remove service key at the
interlock switch and reassemble
side panel.

Repair and Service
3 Optical Adjustments
3.1.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration
Symptom Defect Solution

Exchange of the optic New optic module First carry out an IP
module needs to be adapted to center calibration and
the digitizer afterwards a shading
calibration
Exchange of the BOS Adjustment of the new First carry out an IP
sensor (GS626/GS628) sensor needs to be center calibration and
adapted to the digitizer afterwards a shading
calibration
Exchange of the photo No power supply • Check connections
multiplier
New photomultiplier • Carry out a shading

needs to be adapted to calibration
the digitizer
Exchange of the scan New scan unit can be Check image quality with
unit misadjusted a flat field:
• If the quality is ok, you
do not have to carry
out any adjustment
• If the image has
stripes in slow-scan
direction, first carry
out an IP center
calibration and
afterwards a shading
calibration
Inhomogeneous images Scan area can be • Check if there is dust
with lines in slow-scan dusty in the scan area and
direction clean it with the scan
brush if necessary
Relation between • Check the image
correction factor and quality again and if it
glass fiber can be is still
different inhomogeneous, carry
out a calibration
Inhomogeneous images X-ray device causes Cannot be solved by an
with two-dimensional inhomogeneities adjustment of the
errors digitizer!

Repair and Service
3.1.2 Preparation of Calibration Procedures
The GenRad X-Ray source can be used for both, the GenRad calibrations
and the Mammo calibration.
For each calibration procedure you need a copper filter and an erased image
plate, which is dry, clean and immaculate. The cassette with the image plate
inside should not be identified. If it is identified, an additional confirmation on
the display is needed.
• For the IP center calibration an exposed cassette with a size smaller
than 35 x 43 cm is needed.
• For the shading calibration three different steps are necessary:
a) GenRad Calibration High Resolution
an exposed cassette only with 35 x 43 cm size format must be used (for
detecting the borders of the IP).
b) GenRad Calibration Standard Resolution*
an exposed cassette only with 35 x 43 cm size format must be used (for
detecting the borders of the IP).
c) Mammo Calibration
an exposed cassette with 35 x 43 cm size format can be used, but it is
also possible to use a min. 24 x 30 cm cassette (Mammo cassette also
possible).
* The Standard Resolution calibration is also scanned in HiRes mode, only the
applied pixel time is different.
3.1.3 Exposure of the Cassette

The exposure of the cassette is equal for all calibrations:
The cassette must be exposed with 20 µGy in total. To achieve a good
evenness of the exposure it is recommended to expose two times with 10 µGy
by turning the cassette 180° between the first and the second exposure.
Dose of 10 µGy can be

typically achieved with:
• 12 mAs
• 75 kV
• 1.3 m distance
• large focus
• 1.5 mm copper filter
Use a dosimeter to OK not OK

measure the dose! Figure 6

Repair and Service
Note:
The entire image plate
must be fully exposed!
No collimation is needed!
Figure 7
3.2 IP-Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)

Close side panels of the digitizer during calibration.
3.2.1 Start IP Center Calibration

(2) Select
<2 MAINTENANCE>
(3) Select
<2 Calibration>
(4) Select
<1 IP center calibration>
(5) Parameters are shown on the

display
(6) Insert small exposed cassette,

select format and the calibration
starts automatically
(7) Follow the instructions on the

display
3.2.2 Possible Results of the IP Center Calibration

• Calibration successful
• Failure – underexposed!
In this case, increase exposure dose and redo IP center calibration.
• Failure – overexposed!
In this case, decrease exposure dose and redo IP center calibration.
• Calibration failed!
• Big IP used!
In this case, use a format with a width smaller than 35 cm.
• No flat field?!
• Damaged IP edges?!
• Begin of IP not found!
• IP skewed!
• IP-center out of tolerance

Repair and Service

Close side panels of the digitizer during calibration.
3.3.1 Start Shading Calibration Procedure

(2) Select
<2 MAINTENANCE>
(3) Select
<2 Calibration>
(4) Select
<2 Shading Calibration>
(5) Parameters are shown on the

display
(6) Insert exposed cassette, select

format and the calibration starts
automatically
(7) Follow the instructions on the

display
3.3.2 Possible Results of the Shading Calibration

The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is
one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The values during a calibration
must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095 with a 12 bit adjustment.
3.3.2.1 Successful Calibration

(1) Info message pops up and
calibration line is stored
automatically
(2) Redo the calibration for the other

formats

Repair and Service
3.3.2.2 Underexposed (SAL12bit < 730)

(1) Failure message pops up
(2) Increase the exposure dose and

redo the calibration
(3) If it is still underexposed check

the following digitizer settings:
• Correct installation of the
photomultiplier floppy after a
replacement
• Correct installation of the backup
floppy after software installation
with formatting boot floppy
• Check content of the
SCNxxx00.A00 file where the
parameters are included. It must
contain mfa and mfb values! If
these values are equal to default
(mfa 2.9 and mfb 0.27) it can be,
that the correct values have been
lost at a service interaction.

Repair and Service
3.3.2.3 Overexposed (SAL12bit > 4094)

(2) Reduce the exposure dose and

redo the calibration
(3) If it is still overexposed check the

following digitizer settings:
• Correct installation of the
photomultiplier floppy after a
replacement
• Correct installation of the backup
floppy after software installation
with formatting boot floppy
• Check content of the file where
the parameters are included. It
must contain mfa and mfb values!
If these values are equal to
default (mfa 2.9 and mfb 0.27) it
can be, that the correct values
have been lost at a service
interaction

Repair and Service
3.3.2.4 Dust detected

(2) Clean the fiber optics with the

built-in brush
(3) Check if the exposure was really

a flat field
(4) Check the image plate for
scratches in slow-scan direction
(5) If none of these actions show
success, look at the calibration
curves with a browser and
analyze the flat field image at the
workstation and go on there.
3.3.2.5 Bad IP (too big deviations of the border)

a flat field
(3) Expose another image plate
which is dry, clean and
immaculate.
(4) Redo calibration

Repair and Service
3.3.2.6 No flat field (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)


a flat field
(3) Make sure that the image plate

was exposed without collimation
(4) Check the image plate for

scratches in slow-scan direction
(5) Redo calibration
3.3.2.7 Skewing (warning)


a flat field
4 Checking the Image Quality

Check the image quality with flatfield exposures
5 Backup
Update the backup to save the new machine specific data (calibration, PD-
factor).
Select <3 Save on floppy>
Follow the on-line instructions.

Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services Software Releases and Patches
CR 35-X
Type 5158/100
CR 25.0
Type 5156/100/105
This document describes all customer released software versions*.
* Previously supplied software versions (prior to version C25_3007) are no more listed in this document.

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.0:
1.1 12-2012 Added information about software version c25_3206 and
c25_3013B
Document Title
DD+DIS219.06E Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means
DD+DIS052.09E Service Bulletin No. 8, Distinction between Status Indication and
Error Message: ''DIGITIZER LASER NOT READY Please wait''

eq_standard_e_template_v07
DD+DIS206.10E Repair and Service
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158/100 Chapter 3.8 / Page 2 of 13

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3206 .....................................................4

1.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3206 since Software Version C25_3103B ..............4
1.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B ...................................4
1.2.1 Installation Done Message........................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Protection of Service Tools .......................................................................................................5
1.2.3 Maintenance Notification...........................................................................................................6
1.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B................................6
1.3.1 Maintenance Indicator Messages .............................................................................................6
1.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3206 ........................................................................7
2 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3103B...................................................8

2.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103B since Software Version C25_3103 ..............8
2.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103 ..............8
2.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103B......................................................................8
3 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3103 .....................................................9

3.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103 since Software Version C25_3102.................9
3.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3102 ..............9
3.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103 ........................................................................9
4 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3102 ...................................................10

4.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3102 since Software Version C25_3007...............10
4.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3007....................................11
4.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3007 ................................11
4.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3102 ......................................................................11
5 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3007 ...................................................12

5.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3007 since Software Version C25_2007...............12
5.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_2007....................................13
5.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_2007 ................................13
5.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3007 ......................................................................13


1 Release Info for Digitizer Software C25_3206
Type of new Software Software Upgrade

Release Date 09-2012
Digitizer SNs  Software is installed ex factory on:
CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 8716
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 and 5156 / 100 are already
out of production.
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software is available for
download in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
 Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers >
CR 35-X > Software
CR 25.0 > Software
Prerequisites The new Software is upgradeable from every previous
version of C25_XXXX Software.
1.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3206 since Software Version

C25_3103B
No changes in this version.
1.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B
1.2.1 Installation Done Message
After software installation from USB flash drive the message "installation done" is
displayed to indicate, that the software was successfully uploaded to the Digitizer.


1.2.2 Protection of Service Tools
New service menu available: 6 CONFIGURE > 6 Service protection

This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate a protection mechanism of
the service program.
The protection mechanism is implemented to prevent access by unauthorized service
providers. The protection can be activated with an access plus license code. When this
protection mechanism is activated, access to the service program is only possible with
the access code.
The protection mechanism is switched off by default (factory setting). Hence it first
needs to be activated before it can be utilized.
through standard service password from Agfa.
For details refer to Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means.
IMPORTANT:
The first activation of Service Protection on a device will fail. The web interface will
display the message:
"The size of the serial number is wrong ( == 0) || ( > 20)".
At the local digitizer display no error message is displayed.
(1) Access the menu <Service protection> at the LCD terminal and press
<ok>.
Entering a valid license code is not needed.
(2) Restart the system.
From now on the service protection can be activated or deactivated without
problems.


1.2.3 Maintenance Notification
New service menu available: 6 CONFIGURE > 7 Maint. notification

This service menu provides a feature to set a maintenance interval in terms of time and
cassette cycles. The user will be notified six weeks before.
The service menu allows to activate or de-activate the maintenance notification
mechanism and to define the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM) and the
Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM).
For details refer to Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means.
1.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B
1.3.1 Maintenance Indicator Messages
If the Maintenance Notification is enabled (refer to section 1.2.3), the customer will be
reminded daily or when starting the Digitizer when the following is applicable:
 This message appears 6 weeks before the defined maintenance due date or due
cycles are reached:
"Maintenance interval will expire within a short time.
Please contact service."
 This messages appears, when the maintenance due date or due cycles are
expired:
"Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."


1.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3206
 New version (release 2011.02_Patch9) of the operating system “Portex” has

been introduced. Following items have been improved in this version:
o Support of the new c-Revive and S-Revive boards
o Support of a broader range of different USB flash drives
o Resolves a problem with cluster errors at floppy disk drives
The new operating system is automatically flashed to the CPU Board at the first
startup of the Digitizer after upload of the software.
 Solution for the complaint HQ_0902060003 (adapt description in the infocounter

file)
Reason: Previous information about target values, given in the infocounter, may
not be applicable for each PMT or optic module and caused unnecessary part
replacements.
Therefore the following text (indicated in bold) is removed in the infocounter file:
o “Photomultiplier Sensitivity Monitoring”
Target SAL: 1800+/- 100, target Peak-to-Peak: < 200
If frequently out of range, check image quality
o "Polygon Jitter Monitoring”
300 millipixels: ok
frequently > 300 millipixels: check image quality for jitter


2 Release Info for Digitizer Software C25_3103B

Digitizer SNs  Software is installed ex factory on:
CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 7897
out of production.
download in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
CR 35-X > Software
CR 25.0 > Software
2.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103B since Software Version

C25_3103
2.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version

C25_3103
2.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103B
The maximum limit for the amplifier voltage of the photomultiplier was changed in the
software from 900 V to 1000 V.



Digitizer SNs  CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 5582
out of production.
download under the following MedNet GSO Library path:
 <Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers =>
CR 35-X => Freeware>
CR 25.0 => Freeware>

C25_3102
 Software change to support new Hamamatsu photomultiplier.

 The software C25_3103 supports the use of the new Hamamatsu Photomultiplier
as well as the existing Photonis Photomultiplier.
3.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version

C25_3102
Software was adapted in order to avoid issues during the sensitivity adjustment done
in the production line.



Digitizer SNs  CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 4778
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 is already out of production.

C25_3007
 Automatic adjustment has been implemented to find the best position to pickup
the image plate out from the cassette.
 Error “Medium I/O Error” is now more detailed in case of Read/Write problems
of the storage medium.
 The code message “Code 20507” will not be displayed anymore, if the digitizer
is more than 24 hours in operation.
For more information refer to: DD+DIS052.09E, Service Bulletin No. 8 of CR 35-X
 More detailed error messages:
o Error message “20E0D” split up into messages: “20E0D", "20E2E" and
"20E2F”
o Error message “20E04” split up into messages: “20E0D", "20E30" and
"20E31”


4.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3007
New adjustment cycle in the Service Menu:

<2 Maintenance  3 Test and Adjust Cycle>
4.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3007
 Due to tolerances the image plate in the cassette could not always be well
gathered by the suction cups. A new adjustment wizard for the positioning
of the suction cups will solve this issue.
 In the screen which is displayed after a shading calibration failed, was no option
to skip this menu. Now the <Cancel> bottom is available to skip this screen.


Type of new Software Software Release

Digitizer SNs  CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of SN 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 4000

C25_2007
 Support of the new revive-racks for CR 35-X with USB interface instead of
floppy disk drive.
 HQ_0511110001, Improved handling of RF-Tags: The software will not write
anymore data in protected sectors of the RF-Tag
 Software improvement for “High-Altitude Vacuum Pump” modules for
proper work.
 Setting for the mammography-option is no more changed when installing
a CPF-File (Customer Parameter File).
 Adaptation of the web interface: The correct device-type will be shown
from now on
 New screens of the shading calibration are translated in the different languages
(Version C25L2104 of the language floppy).
 New version of operating system “portex 2006.02”


5.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_2007
 Support of the new revive-racks for CR 35-X with USB interface instead of
floppy disk drive.
 Modified user interface (Service Menu):
o New version of language files
o Specific terms like “floppy” are replaced by e.g. “storage medium” or “data”.
 Modified calibration procedure:
o IP-Center and Shading calibration is also possible with cassettes exposed on
mammography X-ray modalities.
5.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_2007
 Language file version check corrected.

 Modified user interface:
o New version of language files
o Specific terms like “floppy” are replaced by e.g. “storage medium” or “data”.
 Improved network connectivity: If the network connection is lost, the image

will be sent once the network is connected again.
 Improved detection of jitter in the info counter file: If the jitter is above the
threshold, the warning code 20C9B will be written to the info counter file.
 Improved error message for defect erasure lamps:
If all erasure lamps are blown, now the message appears:
"All ERASURE LAMPS BLOWN IP is not erased, Press v"
 If only a single erasure lamp is blown, new message appears:
"ERASURE LAMP x DEFECTIVE. Press v to complete, IP is not erased".
 System Check skips all light barrier connection tests, because the HW cannot
check the light barrier connection correctly if the 24 V power is missing.


Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105

This document contains:
 Reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the
machine including an alphanumeric reference list
 Block diagrams and overall diagrams
 Circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary

Revision Date compared to previous Edition 2.0:
2.1 01-2013  Added information about c-Revive Board, S-Revive
Rack and S-Revive Board
Document Title
DD+DIS255.12E CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part


eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 4 / Page 2 of 37

LIST OF CONTENTS
A IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................5

1 OVERVIEW OF UNITS.............................................................................................................5
2 LIST OF COMPONENTS .........................................................................................................6
3 FRAME (ASSEMBLY NO. 100) ..............................................................................................12
3.1 Diagram Frame .......................................................................................................................12
3.2 Table of Components Frame ..................................................................................................13
4 POWER UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 200)....................................................................................14

4.1 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1...............................................................................................14
4.2 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1 ...........................................................15
4.3 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2...............................................................................................16
4.4 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2 ...........................................................17
4.5 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1...............................................................................................18
4.6 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1 ...........................................................19
4.7 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2...............................................................................................20
4.8 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2 ...........................................................21
5 CPCI RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) CR 35-X UP TO SN 4000, CR 25.0 UP TO SN 6500 ..22
5.1 Diagram cPCI Rack ................................................................................................................22
5.2 Table of Components cPCI Rack with Oberon Board/Scan Master Board ............................23
5.3 Table of Components cPCI Rack with c-Revive Board ..........................................................23
6 REVIVE RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) CR 35-X AS OF SN ≥ 4000, CR 25.0 AS OF SN ≥

6500........................................................................................................................................24
6.1 Diagram Revive Rack .............................................................................................................24
6.2 Table of Components Revive Rack with Revive Board ..........................................................25
6.3 Table of Components Revive Rack with S-Revive Board ......................................................25
7 SCAN UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 400) .......................................................................................26

7.1 Diagram Scan Unit..................................................................................................................26
7.2 Table of Components Scan Unit .............................................................................................27
8 ERASURE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 500)................................................................................28

8.1 Diagram Erasure Unit .............................................................................................................28


8.2 Table of Components Erasure Unit ........................................................................................29
9 IP TRANSPORT UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 600).......................................................................30

9.1 Diagram IP Transport Unit ......................................................................................................30
9.2 Table of Components IP Transport Unit .................................................................................31
10 CASSETTE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 700) ..............................................................................32

10.1 Cassette Unit - Diagram A ......................................................................................................32
10.2 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram A...................................................................33
10.3 Cassette Unit - Diagram B ......................................................................................................34
10.4 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram B...................................................................35
10.5 Cassette Unit - Diagram C ......................................................................................................36
10.6 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram C ..................................................................37
B CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................37


A Identification Diagrams
1 Overview of Units
100
700
600
500
400
200 300
100 Frame
100 Frame
200
200 Power
PowerUnit
Unit
300
300 cPCI
cPCIRack
Rack/ Revive Rack
400 Scan Unit
400 Scan Unit
500 Erasure Unit
500 Erasure Unit
700 Cassette Unit
5156_reg04_001.cdr
700 Cassette Unit
Figure 1


2 List of Components
Component Designation Function Refer to

(also used by Diagnosis mode)
100 BU319 Socket for Service PC Figure 2
100 BU122 Socket for Transport unit power Figure 2
supply
100 BU353 Socket for Erasure unit fan Figure 2
100 GS112 LCD-TERMINAL-BD LCD terminal board Figure 2
100 GS114 IOBUS-DISTRIB I/O-bus distributor board Figure 2
100 GS116 EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency node Figure 2
100 GS118 LCD-DISPLAY LCD display Figure 2
100 M101 POWER-UNIT-FAN Power unit fan Figure 2
500 M501 ERASURE-UNIT-FAN Erasure unit fan Figure 2
100 S101 INTERLOCK-RIGHT Interlock switch right hand side Figure 2
100 ST22 Plug for Transport unit Figure 2
100 ST319 Adapter Ethernet Figure 2
200 BU1 Socket on GS210 Figure 3
200 BU235 Socket Power unit fan Figure 3
200 BU283 Socket for Power integration Figure 3
board
200 BU289 Socket for Erasure unit Figure 3
200 BU306 Socket for cPCI Power board Figure 3
(230 V)



200 D9 LED indicator Figure 3
200 GS210 ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board Figure 3
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board Figure 3
200 S201 MAINS-SWITCH Mains switch with overload Figure 3
protection
200 S202 INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front side Figure 3
200 S203 LINE-SELECTOR Line selector Figure 3
200 SI201 POW-FUSE Power Unit fuse T2.0A Figure 3
200 SI202 SM-TRANSF-FUSE Stepper motor transformer fuse Figure 3
T2.0A
200 ST1 Plug on GS210 Figure 4
200 ST7 Jumper on GS230 Figure 4
200 ST8 Jumper on GS230 Figure 4
200 ST309 Plug Interlock switch right hand Figure 4
side
200 ST310 Plug I/O-bus power unit Figure 4
200 ST337 Plug on BU289, connection to Figure 4
erasure unit
erasure unit
200 BU1 Socket for Current sense board Figure 5
200 BU2 Socket for Current sense board Figure 5
200 BU311 Socket for Transformer Figure 5
200 GS220 CURRENT-SENSE Current sense board Figure 5



200 GS240 POWER-SUPPL Power supply 24 V Figure 5
200 MC201 LINE-FILTER Line filter Figure 5
200 PE1 Ground Figure 5
200 ST1 Plug Current sense board Figure 5
200 ST229 Mains plug Figure 5
200 TR206 30V-TRANSFORMER Stepper motor transformer 30 V Figure 5
200 ERASURE-TRANSF-UNIT Figure 6
200 TR 201 Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6 Figure 6
200 TR 205 Transformer erasure lamps 5, Figure 6
10
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1 Figure 6
200 SI 2 Figure 6
200 SI 3 Figure 6
200 SI 4 Figure 6
200 SI 5 Figure 6
300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor Figure 7
300 GS300 BACKPLANE Backplane Figure 7
300 GS302 SCSI HARDDISK Harddisk (SCSI) Figure 7
300 GS304 FLOPPY loppy drive Figure 7
300 GS306 CPCI-POWER-BD Power unit Figure 7
300 GS310 SCAN-CTRL-M-BD Scan Master Board Figure 7
300 GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD CPU-Oberon Board Figure 7
300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor Figure 7
300 GS301 BACKPLANE Backplane Figure 7
300 GS307 CPCI-POWER Power unit Figure 7
300 GS312 cREVIVE c-Revive Board Figure 7
300 M10 Revive RACK-FAN Fan motors Figure 8
M11



300 GS630 CPCI-POWER-BD Power unit Figure 8
300 GS631 REVIVE-BACKPLANE Revive Backplane Figure 8
300 GS632 REVIVE Revive Board Figure 8
300 HDD2 HARDDISK IDE Harddisk Figure 8
300 GS631 REVIVE-BACKPLANE Revive Backplane Figure 8
300 GS640 sREVIVE S-Revive Board Figure 8
400 M401 ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor Figure 9
400 M402 SLOWSCAN-MOTOR Slowscan drive motor Figure 9
400 GS410 SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of roller lift Figure 9
motor M401
400 GS412 SLOWSCAN-BD Stepper motor board of slow Figure 9
scan motor M402
400 GS420 OPTIKMODUL Optic Module Figure 9
400 GS422 PM-TUBE1 Photomultiplier module Figure 9
400 GS436 POLYGON_CTRL Polygon control board Figure 9
400 GS440 PIN-DIODE-BD Pin diode board Figure 9
400 GS442 IP-ALIGNMENT-LS IP alignment light barrier sender Figure 9
400 GS444 IP- ALIGNMENT -LS IP alignment light barrier Figure 9
receiver
400 GS446 IP-DET-LS Scanner IP detection light Figure 9
barrier
400 GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS Scan roller lift 0-position light Figure 9
barrier
400 ST14 Plug for scan roller lift motor Figure 9
400 ST351 Plug for I/O-bus scan Figure 9
power unit



500 LA1 + ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 1 and 6 Figure 10
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
500 LA5+ ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 5 and 10 Figure 10
LA10
600 GS604 IP-TRANSP-0-LS IP transport 0-position light Figure 11
barrier
600 GS606 SOLENOID-VALVE Solenoid valve Figure 11
600 GS608 VACUUM-PUMP Vacuum pump Figure 11
600 M601 IP-TRANSPORT-MOT IP transport motor Figure 11
600 ST123 Plug and socket for power Figure 11
supply stepper motor
600 ST350 Plug and socket for solenoid Figure 11
valve and vacuum pump
700 GS716 CASS-OPEN-0-LS Cassette opener Figure 12
0-position light barrier
700 GS720 CASS-SWITCH Cassette detection switch Figure 12
700 GS722 CASS-CLAMP-0-LS Cassette clamp Figure 12
700 GS726 CASS-POS-DET-LS Cassette position detection light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS728 ALIGN-0-POS-LS IP alignment 0-position light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS730 IP-POS-DET-LS IP position detection light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS732 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light Figure 12
barrier sender
700 GS734 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light Figure 12
barrier receiver
700 GS736 RF-TAG-READER RF-tag serial reader Figure 12
700 GS738 RF-TAG-ANTENNA RF-tag antenna Figure 12



700 M702 CASS-OPENER-MOT Cassette opener motor Figure 12
700 GS714 CASS-BELT-0-LS Cassette belt 0-position light Figure 13
barrier
700 GS718 CASS-LIFT-0-LS Cassette lift 0-position light Figure 13
barrier
700 GS724 CASS-CLAMP-LS Cassette clamp light barrier Figure 13
700 M701 CASS-ROLLER-MOT Cassette roller motor Figure 13
700 M703 CASS-LIFT-MOT Cassette lift motor Figure 13
700 M704 CASS-BELT-MOT Cassette unit belt motor Figure 13
700 M705 CASS-CLAMP-MOT Cassette clamping motor Figure 13
700 M706 IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT IP alignment stepper motor Figure 13
700 BU170 Socket for 40 V cassette power Figure 14
supply
700 BU377 Socket for RF-tag serial reader Figure 14
700 GS710 5FOLD-STEP-BD Fivefold stepper motor board, Figure 14
5FOLD-STEP-JL1 jumper JL1

700 GS712 IP-ALIGNMENT-BD IP alignment board Figure 14
700 ST5 Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit Figure 14
700 ST21 Plug and Socket for cassette Figure 14
opener motor


3 Frame (Assembly No. 100)
3.1 Diagram Frame
BU353
M501
BU319
ST22
5158_reg04_001.cdr
Figure 2: Frame


3.2 Table of Components Frame
Ass. Abbre- Designation Function Circuit

viation (also used by diagram
Diagnosis mode) page
100 BU319 Socket for Service PC 7

100 BU122 Socket for Transport unit power 6
supply
100 BU353 Socket for Erasure unit fan 5
100 GS112 LCD-TERMINAL-BD LCD terminal board 7
100 GS114 IOBUS-DISTRIB I/O-bus distributor board 7
100 GS116 EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency node 7
100 GS118 LCD-DISPLAY LCD display 7
100 M101 POWER-UNIT-FAN Power unit fan 7
500 M501 ERASURE-UNIT- Erasure unit fan 5
FAN
100 S101 INTERLOCK-RIGHT Interlock switch right hand side 7
100 ST22 Plug for Transport unit 6
100 ST319 Adapter Ethernet 7


4 Power Unit (Assembly No. 200)
4.1 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1
ST5
BU1 ST4
BU2
BU3 BU6
BU4
BU5
ST3
BU3
ST2 GS210
BU8
GS230 ST1
ST2
ST1
BU5
ST7
D9
ST8 S203
D10
D11
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU235 BU289
BU306 BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
Figure 3: Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1


4.2 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1

200 BU1 Socket on GS210 4

200 BU235 Socket Power unit fan 4
200 BU283 Socket for Power integration 4
board
200 BU289 Socket for Erasure unit 4
200 BU306 Socket for cPCI Power board 4
(230 V)
200 D9 LED indicator 4
200 GS210 ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board 4
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board 4
200 S201 MAINS-SWITCH Mains switch with overload 4
protection
200 S202 INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front side 4
200 S203 LINE-SELECTOR Line selector 4
200 SI201 POW-FUSE Power Unit fuse T2.0A 4
200 SI202 SM-TRANSF-FUSE Stepper motor transformer fuse 4
T2.0A


4.3 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2
ST5
BU1 ST4
BU2
BU3 BU6
BU4
BU5
ST3
BU3
ST2 GS210
BU8
GS230 ST1
ST2
ST1
BU5
ST7
D9
ST8 S203
D10
D11
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU235 BU289
BU306 BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
Figure 4: Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2


4.4 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2

200 ST1 Plug on GS210 4

200 ST7 Jumper on GS230 --
For settings, see chapter 3.5.
200 ST8 Jumper on GS230 --
For settings, see chapter 3.5.
200 ST309 Plug Interlock switch right hand 4
side
200 ST310 Plug I/O-bus power unit 4
200 ST337 Plug on BU289, connection to 4
erasure unit
erasure unit


4.5 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
PE1
TR202
TR204
TR201 BU1
TR205 ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
Figure 5: Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1


4.6 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1

viation (in Diagnosis mode) diagram
page
200 BU1 Socket for Current sense board 4
GS220
200 BU2 Socket for Current sense board 4
GS220
200 BU311 Socket for Transformer 4
200 GS220 CURRENT-SENSE Current sense board 4
200 GS240 POWER-SUPPL Power supply 24 V 4
200 MC201 LINE-FILTER Line filter 4
200 PE1 Ground 4
200 ST1 Plug Current sense board GS220 4
200 ST229 Mains plug 4
200 TR206 30V- Stepper motor transformer 30 V 4
TRANSFORMER


4.7 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
PE1
TR202
TR204
TR201 BU1
TR205 ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
Figure 6: Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2


4.8 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2
Erasure Transformer Unit

viation diagram
page
200 ERASURE- 4
TRANSF-UNIT
200 TR 201 Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6 4
GS230 Fuses
Ass. Abbr. Designation Fuse Quality

200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1 T 2.5 A
200 SI 2 T 2.5 A
200 SI 3 T 2.5 A
200 SI 4 T 2.5 A
200 SI 5 T 6.25 A


5 cPCI Rack (Assembly No. 300)

CR 35-X up to SN 4000, CR 25.0 up to SN 6500
NOTE:
The cPCI Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 up to SN < 6500
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 100 up to SN < 6000
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 up to SN < 4000
5.1 Diagram cPCI Rack
M301
M708*
M301
GS302
GS304
GS300 GS650*
GS301*
GS300
GS310
GS306
GS312 GS306
GS307*
SATA HD 2,5’’*
P1/5*
* c-Revive-Board
Figure 7: cPCI Rack and c-Revive Board


5.2 Table of Components cPCI Rack with Oberon Board/Scan Master Board

300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor 2

300 GS300 BACKPLANE Backplane 2
300 GS302 HARDDISK SCSI Harddisk 2
300 GS304 FLOPPY Floppy drive 2
300 GS306 CPCI-POWER-BD Power supply 2
300 GS310 SCAN-CTRL-M-BD Scan Master Board 2
300 GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD CPU-Oberon Board 2
5.3 Table of Components cPCI Rack with c-Revive Board
NOTE:
The c-Revive Board includes a SATA harddisk. It is available as spare part and
replaces the following components:
GS302 HARDDISK, GS304 FLOPPY, GS310 SCAN-CTRL-MASTER, and
GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD
For further details refer to CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E.

300 M301 Fan motor 10

300 GS301 BACKPLANE Backplane 10
300 GS307 CPCI-POWER Power supply 10
300 G650 cREVIVE c-Revive Board 10
300 SATA HD 2,5‘’ SATA Harddisk 10
300 P1/5 USB USB Port 10


6 Revive Rack (Assembly No. 300)

CR 35-X as of SN ≥ 4000, CR 25.0 as of SN ≥ 6500
NOTE:
The Revive Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of SN ≥ 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN ≥ 4000
6.1 Diagram Revive Rack
M10+M11
M12+M13*
GS631
Backplane
GS632
GS640*
HDD2
SATA HD 2,5’’*
P1/5
GS630
* S-Revive Board
Figure 8: Revive Rack


6.2 Table of Components Revive Rack with Revive Board

300 M10 Fan motors 8

M11
300 GS631 REVIVE- Backplane 8
BACKPLANE
300 GS632 REVIVE Revive Board 8
300 HDD2 HARDDISK IDE Harddisk 8
300 P1/5 USB USB Port for USB flash drive 8
6.3 Table of Components Revive Rack with S-Revive Board

300 M12 Fan motors 9

M13
300 GS631 REVIVE- Backplane 9
BACKPLANE
300 GS640 sREVIVE S-Revive Board 9
300 SATA HD 2,5‘’ SATA Harddisk 9
300 P1/5 USB USB Port for USB flash drive 9


7 Scan Unit (Assembly No. 400)
7.1 Diagram Scan Unit
Figure 9: Scan Unit


7.2 Table of Components Scan Unit

400 M401 ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor 3

400 M402 SLOWSCAN- Slowscan drive motor 3
MOTOR
400 GS410 SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of roller lift 3
motor M401
400 GS412 SLOWSCAN-BD Stepper motor board of slow 3
scan motor M402
400 GS420 OPTIKMODUL Optic Module 3
400 GS422 PM-TUBE1 Photomultiplier module 3
400 GS436 POLYGON_CTRL Polygon control board 3
400 GS440 PIN-DIODE-BD Pin diode board 3
400 GS442 IP-ALIGNMENT-LS IP alignment light barrier sender 3
400 GS444 IP- ALIGNMENT - IP alignment light barrier receiver 3
LS
400 GS446 IP-DET-LS Scanner IP detection light barrier 3
400 GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS Scan roller lift 0-position light 3
barrier
400 ST14 Plug for scan roller lift motor 3
400 ST351 Plug for I/O-bus scan 3


8 Erasure Unit (Assembly No. 500)
8.1 Diagram Erasure Unit
BU358
LA1
LA2
LA3
LA4
LA5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
LA10
5156_reg04_007.cdr
Figure 10: Erasure Unit


8.2 Table of Components Erasure Unit


power unit
500 LA1 + ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 1 and 6 5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
500 LA5+ ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 5 and 10 5
LA10
NOTE:
Erasure unit fan M501 is part of the frame (Assembly No. 100)!


9 IP Transport Unit (Assembly No. 600)
9.1 Diagram IP Transport Unit
ST350
JL1 ST123
1 8
GS608
GS602
GS604
GS606
M 601
5155_reg04_005.cdr
Figure 11: IP Transport Unit


9.2 Table of Components IP Transport Unit

600 GS602 IP-TRANSPORT-BD IP transport board 6

600 GS604 IP-TRANSP-0-LS IP transport 0-position light 6
barrier
600 GS606 SOLENOID-VALVE Solenoid valve 6
600 GS608 VACUUM-PUMP Vacuum pump 6
600 M601 IP-TRANSPORT- IP transport motor 6
MOT
600 ST123 Plug and socket for power supply 6
stepper motor
600 ST350 Plug and socket for solenoid 6
valve and vacuum pump


10 Cassette Unit (Assembly No. 700)
10.1 Cassette Unit - Diagram A
GS736
GS738 M702
GS728
GS716
GS726
GS720 GS730
GS732
GS722
GS734 5155_reg04_010.cdr
Figure 12: Cassette Unit - Diagram A


10.2 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram A

700 GS716 CASS-OPEN-0-LS Cassette opener 1

700 GS720 CASS-SWITCH Cassette detection switch 1
700 GS722 CASS-CLAMP-0-LS Cassette clamp 1
700 GS726 CASS-POS-DET-LS Cassette position detection light 1
barrier
700 GS728 ALIGN-0-POS-LS IP alignment 0-position light 1
barrier
700 GS730 IP-POS-DET-LS IP position detection light 1
barrier
700 GS732 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light 1
barrier sender
700 GS734 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light 1
barrier receiver
700 GS736 RF-TAG-READER RF-tag serial reader 1
700 GS738 RF-TAG-ANTENNA RF-tag antenna 1
700 M702 CASS-OPENER-MOT Cassette opener motor 1


10.3 Cassette Unit - Diagram B
GS714
GS718
GS724
M703
M705
M704
M701
M706 5155_reg04_011.cdr
Figure 13: Cassette Unit - Diagram B


10.4 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram B

700 GS714 CASS-BELT-0-LS Cassette belt 0-position light 1

barrier
700 GS718 CASS-LIFT-0-LS Cassette lift 0-position light 1
barrier
700 GS724 CASS-CLAMP-LS Cassette clamp light barrier 1
700 M701 CASS-ROLLER-MOT Cassette roller motor 1
700 M703 CASS-LIFT-MOT Cassette lift motor 1
700 M704 CASS-BELT-MOT Cassette unit belt motor 1
700 M705 CASS-CLAMP-MOT Cassette clamping motor 1
700 M706 IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT IP alignment stepper motor 1


10.5 Cassette Unit - Diagram C
GS712
BU377
ST21 ST5
JL1 JL2 BU170

1 8 8 1 5156_reg04_005.cdr
GS710
Figure 14: Cassette Unit - Diagram C


10.6 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram C

700 BU170 Socket for 40 V cassette power 1

supply
700 BU377 Socket for RF-tag serial reader 1
700 GS710 5FOLD-STEP-BD Fivefold stepper motor board, 1

700 GS712 IP-ALIGNMENT-BD IP alignment board 1
700 ST5 Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit 1
700 ST21 Plug and Socket for cassette 1
opener motor
B Circuit Diagrams
Overview of Circuit Diagrams F1.5158.4003.1C
Sheet No. Sheet Name

1 CASSETTE_UNIT_700
2 PCI_RACK_300
3 SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400
4 POWER_UNIT_200
5 ERASURE_UNIT_500
6 IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
7 FRAME_100
8 REVIVE_efer
9 sREVIVE
10 cREVIVE
The Circuit Diagrams (Sheets 1-10) can be found on the following pages.


A B C D E F G H
GS736-RF- GS738-RF-
TAG-READER TAG-ANTENNA
1 F7.0486.1316.X 1
F7.0486.1351.X BU1 BU1
*6/6 *6
*6/6
M704-CASS-BELT-MOT F8.5155.4508.X
M705-CASS-CLAMP-MOT M703_CASS-LIFT-MOT M702-CASS-OPENER-MOT M701-CASS-ROLLER-MOT -M706-IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT
RD BR RD BR BR BR
RDWT M M RDWT M M M M
BKWT OR BKWT OR OR OR
BK BK
RD YE RD YE RD YE RD YE ST1
#11/20
GNWT
YE
YEWT
GNWT
YE
YEWT
GN
GN
7/20
2/20
3/20
4/20
5/20
6/20
8/20
9/20
ST1
1/20
1
F8.5145.4574.X 1 1
700MA13 1
1 700MA1 700MA9 700MA7
GS736/ST1
BU377 ST377
1
2
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
1 1 1
1
2 700MA15 2 2 2
700MA11
2
3
4
1
700MA6 3 3
F8.5145.4524.X
F8.5145.4574.X
4 4
B1
F8.5156.4622.X
B2
B3
B4
5 5
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5145.4574.X
ST21
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
F8.5158.4690.X 6 6 RF_READER
A1
A2
A3
A4
F8.5156.4506.X 7 7
-BU371 8 8
9 9
1
2
3
4
10000µF/63V 1/2 1/2 F8.5155.4502.X
1 1 700MA14 1 +
1 700MA12
2/2 2/2
L8.7674.8820.0
1
700MA16 700MA10 700C1 100MA
-ST360
1
700MA3
1
700MA8 700MA2
ST157
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
1/5 1 BU170 ST170
ST5
BU1
1/2
2/2
2/4
3/4
4/4
*4/4
1/4
F8.5155.4502.X
ST35
ST34
ST32
ST33
ST23
ST24
ST17
ST18
ST15
ST14
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
*2/2 2/5
3/5 1 1 40v_cass
4/5 2 2 F8.5155.4612.X
/POWER_UNIT_200.2
*4/4 5/5 5 3 3
3 4 4
ST4 3
*2/2 JL1
1234 5678
*2/2
GS710-5FOLD- 1/1
8 76 5 43 2 1
12 34 5 67 8
STEP-BD
SUBNODE2
SUBNODE1
ST10
*4/4 4A 2A F8.5155.4629.X
F8.9499.8120.X ST421
JL2
ST1 GS712/BU1
*4/4 F8.5155.4636.X IO-BUS_CASS
JL1
*26/26 *26 #2 1 #26

/FRAME_100.2A
*26 *26 *26 *26
*4/4 F8.5155.4504.X
*4/4 ST5 BU349
700MA5
*4/4
GS712-IP-
*4/4 *4/4 ALIGNMENT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
*4/4
ST2
ST3
*4/4
*4/4
4 *4/4 4
*4/4
*4
*4
F8.9889.0615.X
ST38
ST40
ST39
ST11
ST19
ST51
*26/26
*26/26
ST2
ST8
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST3
4/6
2/6
3/6
5/6
6/6
1/6
*4/4
F8.9889.0555.X
*4
1
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
2
3
4
5
6
*26
GS710/BU3
1 F8.5155.4504.X
F8.9889.0540.X
F8.9889.0560.X
F8.9889.0555.X
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.5156.4518.X
F8.9889.0570.X
F8.5155.4510.X
5
5
*3
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
*4
ST1
*3/3
ST1
ST1
ST1
4/4
4/4
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
*4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST1
*4/4
X
X
X
X VDE/UL/CSA
- Teil -
GS714-CASS- GS718-CASS- GS722-CASS- GS724-CASS- GS734-CASS- GS732-CASS- GS728-ALIGN- GS730-IP-POS-
Aenderungen
LIFT-0-LS GS716-CASS- GS720-CASS- GS726-CASS- nur mit
BELT-0-LS CLAMP-LS OPEN-0-LS POS-DET-LS IN-DET-LS IN-DET-LS 0-POS-LS DET-LS
CLAMP-0-LS SWITCH Zustimmung
F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.5880.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.5156.7000.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.5100.7460.X F8.9499.4630.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6770.X von
third parties without explicit authorisation is strictly forbidden.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information
FT-LPS
contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
6
6
1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
General Schematic Project
1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: CASSETTE_UNIT_700 / 100

Sheet 1
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

A B C D E F IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
A B C D E F
CPCI-RACK-FAN 3J4 BU5 BU1

#135/137 *3/3 *3/3
-M300
3J1
M #135/137
ST429
2 1 BU6 ST1
#48/50 #48/50
ST427 BU875 BU1
1 1 1 1/2
1 2 2 2 2/2 1
GS306
F8.5146.1430.X
CPCI-POWER-BD
F8.5155.4670.X
BU883 MC301 BU877

L 1
L L1
BU876 ST3 BU4 GS310/ST4
BU870 1 1/4
PE 3A 1 1/17 1 bk
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F 2/4
250VAC 2/17 2 br
3 3/4
8/17 8 rd
BU313
N 1 4 4/4 9/17 9 or
2J4 BU2 10/17 10 ye
N N1
#135/137 #135/137 15/17 15 gn
POWER 3/17 3 bk
300PE1 4/17 4 L7.0460.9089.0
1 br
7/17 7 rd F8.5158.4636.X PM_1
11/17 11 or /SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
12/17 12 ye
14/17 14 gn
5/17 5 bk
2
The area between countinuous line 6/17 6 br
2
13/17 13
may be replaced by 16/17 16
rd
17/17 17
see page 8 (REVIVE_efer) or 2J1
#135/137
BU1
#135/137 L7.0460.9074.0
BU6 GS310/ST6
see page 9 (sREVIVE) or #10/11 #10 F7.0477.1084.X POLYGON_CTRL
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
see page 10 (cREVIVE) ST2 GS310/BU2

#9/11 #9 F8.5156.4622.X RF_READER
/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.2I
10/11 10
BU3 GS310/ST3
#9/10 #9 F8.5156.4640.X LCD
/FRAME_100.1A
SCAN-CTRL-M-BD
BU5 GS310/ST5
#25/27 #25 F8.5156.4570.X IO_Bus_PCI
/FRAME_100.2A
26/27 26 K81:SH1
ST2 BU314 BU317 ST1
#34/36 *34 *34 #34/36 ST1 GS310/BU1
3 #25/27 #25 3
L7.0460.9089.0
26/27 26 F8.5156.4646.X LD-MODUL

/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
F8.5146.1460.X
GS310
ST1 BU315
1/4 1
GS304 2/4 2
FLOPPY 1J4 P4
L7.0486.1365.X #135/137 #135/137
ST1 GS312/BU1
*8/8 *8 (8) F7.0477.1070.0 ethernet
/FRAME_100.3A
ST1 BU316 BU318 ST428 ST318 BU3
1/4 1 1 1/4 1J2 P8
2/4 2 1 1 2 2/2 #135/137 #135/137
3/4 3 2 2 3 3/4
4/4 4 3 3 4 4/4
4 4 BU1 GS312/ST1
2 F8.5156.4610.X service
*10/10 *10
/FRAME_100.1A
ST2 ST2 1J1 P10
#68/70 #68/70 #135/137 #135/137
GS302 4
4
HARDDISK
F7.0486.1354.X 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
F8.5146.1500.X 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
F7.0486.1342.0
CPU-OBERON-BD 06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
BACKPLANE 1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
GS312 / 100
F8.5146.1440.X GS300 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: PCI_RACK_300
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 2
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
/POWER_UNIT_200.2F
A B C D E F
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
/FRAME_100.2A
GS442 GS444 GS446
f7-5155-2221-0.dfb f1-5155-2233-0a.dfb
F8.9499.4640.X
IP-Alignment-LS IP-Alignment-LS
SCAN-IP-DET-LS
GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS
#8/10
ST1
ST1
ST1
*4/4
PM_1
*4/4
40V_SCAN
IO-BUS_SCAN
POLYGON_CTRL
LD-MODUL
F8.9499.6540.x
GS446/BU1
*4
#8
GS442/BU1 GS444/BU1
*4
F8.5155.4432.X
F8.9889.0520.X
*10
*4
1 1
GS440/BU1
ST1
*4/4
GS440/BU3
BU1
#6/7
ST3
#10/12
ST1
*4/4
F8.5155.4628.X
F8.5155.4638.X
GS448/BU1
*4
L7.0460.9089.0 IR-Send
D7
F8.5158.4636.X
#12/14
F8.9889.0580.X
ST2
400MA2 GS440-PIN-DIODE-BD
f1-5155-4963-0a.dfs
1
GS440/BU2
*12
GS422/BU1
F8.5155.4434.X
BU351 ST351
F8.5155.4436.X
15 gn
14 gn
1 bk
3 bk
5 bk
10 ye
12 ye
*26 *26
2 br
9 or
4 br
11 or
6 br
8 rd
7 rd
13 rd
400MA2
16
17
*4
*4
*26
*26
*4
*4
GS410/BU2 GS410/ST3 GS412/BU1 GS412/BU2
1 GS410/BU1 GS412/ST3
2 2
400MA1
1/17
2/17
10/17
15/17
4/17
11/17
12/17
14/17
6/17
13/17
16/17
17/17
8/17
9/17
3/17
7/17
5/17
ST1
*26/26
GS412/BU4
ST1
*26/26
ST2
ST4
*4/4
*4/4
ST3
ST2
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST8
ST3
1 1/5 +
F7.0477.1084.X
F8.5156.4646.X
ST11 2 2/5
ST1
*4/4 +
3/5
4 4/5 GND
St10 5 5/5 GND St10
GS410/BU4 ST4 ST8
*4/4
1 1/5 + 4A 2A 4A 2A
2 2/5 + JL1
JL1 ST11
-GS422-PM-Module 3/5 *4/4
L7.0460.9074.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F8.5148.2280. 4 4/5 GND
5 5/5 GND ST10 ST10
*3/3 *3/3
F8.9499.8140.X ST5
*4/4 F8.9499.8140.X
GS410-SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT GS412-SLOWSCAN-BD
400MA7
ST7
S329
ST5
ST7
4/4
2/4
2/4
4/4
4/4
3/4
3/4
1/4
1/4
GS412/BU5
3 3
GS410/BU7
1
1
3
3
4
4
2
2
ST1 400MA3
*8/8 *8 1
S1
F8.5145.4592.X
GS436/BU1
1
400MA4
3
4
2
1
-GS436-Polygon-Driver-BD
WHRD
A1
A2
A4
A3
ST14
RD
F8.5146.2510.X
B4
B3
B2
B1
BU421
-M301
GN
M1
1
3
4
1 400MA5
WHGN
1 400MA6
ST2 GS420/BU2 4
4 #25/27 #25
YE WT 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
F8.5145.4578.X
26/27 26 Shielding General Schematic Project

GS420 OPTIKMODUL 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
F8.5148.2700. BL 06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
M RD 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400 / 100
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 3
M401-ROLLER-LIFT-MOT
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
(IP-Clamp) 0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
F8.5155.4130.X ST229
100V
MC201-LINE-FILTER F7.0460.9064.0
3 BU327 BU230 BU324 BU321 BU320 BU298 BU229
12 11
4 3
F8.5155.4120.X
L1 L F8.5158.4110.X L 100/120/230V
2 120V
( LOAD )
5
5
4
3
2
1
( LINE )
BU328
Netz
BU299 50/60 Hz
Last
-BU266 PE
240V BU305
8 7 BU326
LAST
F8.5155.4120.X
Netz
1 230V
PE BU302 N
ST4
S203-LINE-SELECTOR
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
BU325 22 21 BU323
-BU6 -ST237 S202-INTERLOCK-FRONT BU322 N1 N BU303
F8.5155.4670.X Netz_Rack ( power_rack )
1/3 1/3 S201-MAINS-SWITCH
F8.5158.4120.X /PCI_RACK_300.1A
2/3 -ST237 BU283 -ST283 ( fan_erasure )
3/3 3/3 BU334 9 9 Luefter-Loesch
BU304 /ERASURE_UNIT_500.4A
ST3 -BU267 200PE1 8 8
1 F8.5155.4614.X 1
BU273 8 10 BU335 7 7
1/4 1
F8.5158.4120.X 1 1
230VAC /11 6 6
30.8VAC
-XK14
BU272 2 2
2/4 2 6 120VAC T2A 5 5 Transport
-XK13 BU369 3 3
F8.5158.4142.X BU271 4 IN 4 4 /IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
3/4 3 100VAC BU306 ST308
BU330 3 3 F8.5155.4614.X
SI201
T2A BU333 BU336 2 2
4/4 4 1 1 1 0V 14
1 1
BU331 BU332 TR206-30V- /15 200MA3
ST5 -BU292 Si202 GS240-24V- F8.5155.4160.X
F8.5155.4120.X TRANFORMER ( fan_LE )
*3/3 *3
POWER-SUPPL Luefter-LE
1 1 /FRAME_100.1A
-BU288
F8.5155.4660.X
2 2
BU235 ST235
10
11
12
13
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
1
7
TR201-ERASURE-TRANSF
230VAC
9 br rt (rd) 11
12.4
VAC
ST6
1/14
2/14
3/14
4/14
5/14
6/14
7/14
8/14
9/14
10/14
11/14
12/14
13/14
14/14
-ST234
120.1VAC
-XK11
-XK12
1
8 (rd) rt rt (rd) 13
BU1 F7.0460.9079.0
1/4 1 100VAC
-ST266 BU3
7 (bk) sw
1 1/3 +24VDC
2/4 2 rt
sw (bk) 15 F8.5156.4150.B 2 2/3
12.4
D11 F8.5155.4638.X
GND24
VAC
2 3/4 3 *10/10 *10 40V_SCAN 2
3.2AT 3/3 T2,5A
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_4
4/4 4 0V +5V gn
F8.5156.6480.X 6 sw (bk) 17 -ST8 BU8 rt SI2 D10 BU5 -ST352
D10
bl 1 1/4
2 2/4 SI1 D10 GE
TR202-ERASURE-TRANSF F8.5155.4140.0
9
3 3/4 T2,5A
230VAC 11
br rt (rd) 4 4/4 SI4 D9 GN 1/4 1
13.0
VAC
F8.5155.4120.X ST5 T2,5A

2/4 2
40v_cass
-ST233
8 120.1VAC *3 *3/3 3/4 3 /CASSETTE_UNIT_700.3I

SI5 F8.5155.4612.X
(rd) rt rt (rd) D9 RT 4/4 4
-BU293
BU2 13 T6,25A ST2
1/4 1 7 100VAC GS230-POWER-
15 SI3
2/4 2 (bk) sw D9 GE
sw (bk) INTEGR-BD
*26/26
-BU308
12.4
ST1
3/4 3
VAC
T2,5A
3.2AT F8.5156.6480.X
4/4 4 6 0V F8.5156.6450.X
BU311 1 1
ST291
F8.5156.6480.X bl sw (bk)
2 2
17 -BU341 IO-BUS_LE
3 3 F8.5155.4190.X ST310 F8.5155.4632.X
TR203-ERASURE-TRANSF 4 4
5 5
/FRAME_100.2A
230VAC BU314
6 6 F8.5155.4170.X
9 br rt (rd) 11 200MA5
12.4
7 7 2 2
VAC
8 8 F8.5155.4140.X 1 1 /FRAME_100.4A
-ST232
120.1VAC Interlock
9 9
8 (rd) rt -ST309 BU309 F8.5155.4642.X
3 rt (rd) 13 10 10 3
BU3
BU289 ST337
1/4 1 100VAC
2/4 2 7 (bk) sw 1 1
sw (bk) 15
12.4
2 2
VAC
3/4 3
-ST313
3.2AT 3 3
4/4 4 6 0V BU1
-BU2 4 4
F8.5156.6480.X sw (bk) 17 4 4/12 4/12 4 5 5
F8.5155.4170.X 6 6 F8.5156.4680.X
GS210-ERASURE- bl 3 3/12 3/12 3
7 7
CTRL-BD TR204-ERASURE-TRANSF 12 12/12 12/12 12 8 8
9 230VAC 11 6 6/12 6/12 6 9 9
F8.5155.6420.X br rt (rd) 10 10
2/12 2/12
13.0
2 2 ( Erasure_drilled )
VAC
11 11
11/12 11/12
-ST231
8 11 11 12 12 Loesch_verdrillt
120.1VAC /ERASURE_UNIT_500.3A
(rd) rt
9 9/12 9/12 9 F8.5156.4680.X
rt (rd) BU312 ST338
BU4
13
1 1/12 1/12 1
1/4 1 7 100VAC 7 7/12 7/12 7 1 1
15 2 2
2/4 2 (bk) sw 10 10/12 10/12 10
sw (bk)
12.4
F8.5155.4170.X 3 3
3/4 3
VAC
ST310 4 4 F8.5156.4680.X
4/4 4 6 3.2AT 0V GS220- 5
5
ST1
*20/20
F8.5156.6480.X
bl sw (bk) CURRENT-SENSE 6 6
F8.5155.6440.X 7 7
17
F8.5156.6480.X
8 8
TR205-ERASURE-TRANSF
BU5 -ST230 230VAC -BU318/AR 4
4 9 br rt (rd) 11
*20
12.4
1/4 1
VAC
2/4 2 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME

120.1VAC
3/4 3
8 (rd) rt rt (rd) 13
*26/26
*20/20
4/4 4
ST1
ST2
100VAC CR35-X 5158

F8.5155.4190.X
F8.5155.4180.X
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR. 06.12.2012 AGGBN

F8.5156.6480.X 7 (bk) sw
sw (bk) 15
12.4
ERASURE- Sheet name: POWER_UNIT_200 / 100

VAC
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM

3.2AT
*20
0V TRANSF-UNIT
*26
BU342
BU317
6 sw (bk) 17 0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 4

F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
F8.5155.4180.X
bl
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH
A B C D E F
1
ERASURE-LAMPS 1
LA1 LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10
2 2
F8.5155.3585.X
9/9
8/9 8/9
7/9 7/9
6/9 6/9
5/9 5/9
4/9 4/9
3/9 3/9
2/9 2/9
1/9 1/9
-BU350 -ST350
( Erasure_drilled ) 12/12 12/12
Loesch_verdrillt
/POWER_UNIT_200.4F 11/12 11/12
F8.5156.4680.X 10/12 10/12
9/12 9/12
8/12 8/12
7/12 7/12
6/12 6/12
5/12 5/12
3 4/12 4/12 3
3/12 3/12
2/12 2/12
1/12 1/12
-BU358 -ST349
M501-ERASURE-
UNIT-FAN
S
(fan_erasure ) 3 3
2
Luefter-Loesch 2 2
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
F8.5155.4614.X 1 1 F8.5155.3620.X
1
ST353 BU353
100MA12
4
4
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: ERASURE_UNIT_500 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 5
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
BU122 ST122 F8.5155.4212.X ST350

1 1
2 2 BU361 ST1
Transport BU365 BU360 1/4 +24V
3 3 1 A1 B1 1 1
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
4 4 2 A2 B2 2 1 2/4
F8.5155.4614.X
5 5 A3 B3 BU362
F8.5155.4216.X
6 6 4 A4 B4 4
5 A5 B5 5
3/4
100MA10 600MA1 600MA2
1 1
GS606-
SOLENOID-VALVE
F7.0424.2164.0
BU366
2
3
4
1
B1
B2
B3
B4
ST123
S1535
BU363 ST1
A1
A2
A3
A4
1 1/4
PUMP+24V
BU364
1
BU123
2
3
4
1 2/4
600MA3
PUMP
3/4
F8.5155.4214.X
2 GS608- 2
BU359
600MA4
VACUUM-PUMP
2
4
5
1
F7.0431.7210.0
ST4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
BU70 BU71
ST2 ST1
*4/4 *4 *4 *4/4
JL1
1234 5678 F8.9889.0535.X
GS604-IP-
ST3
*4/4 TRANSP-0-LS
ST10 F8.9499.6770.X
4A 2A
ST7
*4/4
M601-IP-
TRANSPORT-MOT
F8.5156.4626.X ST5 BU347
BU148[V]
ST1 1/4 1 BR
IO-BUS_TRANS
/FRAME_100.3A
ST22[L] BU22[V] *26
*26/26 2/4 2 M
3 *26 F8.5155.4210.X 3/4 3 OR 3
*26
4/4 4
100MA11 GS602-IP- F8.5155.6140.X
RD YE
TRANSPORT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
4
4
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 6
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
F8.5156.4610.X
2
/PCI_RACK_300.4F Service
*25
service -BU319
100MA8
M101-POWER-
UNIT-FAN
2
F8.5155.4660.X
M
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
1 1
Luefter-LE
1
( fan_LE)
BU1
*8/8
ST9
*20/20
ST4 BU419
L7.0460.9074.0 *2/2 *2 J1
LCD F8.5156.4640.X
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
ST12
1/8 ST5 BU417 ST1
GS112/BU12 *20/20 *20/20
2 2/8
3 3/8 BU418
4 4/8
ST375[A]
BU2
GS118-LCD
5 5/8
IO_Bus_PCI F8.5156.4570.X #25 *25/25 DISPLAY
/PCI_RACK_300.3F 6 6/8
GND 7 7/8
F8.8377.3202.X
BU350[K] 8 8/8
ST1
F8.5155.4629.X *26 ST1
*26/26
/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.4I
IO-BUS_CASS 100MA7 14
100MA3
2 12 2
GS114/BU2 ST10
ST2 11
F8.5155.4628.X *26 *20/20
*26/26
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1C 10
IO-BUS_SCAN 100MA4 9
BU348[K] ST3 6
F8.5155.4632.X *26 *26/26
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F 3
IO-BUS_LE 2
100MA5
GS112- 1
BU356[F] LCD-TERMINAL-BD
ST4
F8.5156.4626.X *26 F8.8377.1450.X
*26/26
/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600.3A
IO-BUS_TRANS
100MA6
ST6
*26/26
ST7 1 2 3 6 9 10 11 12 14
F8.5156.4634.X
*26/26
ST5 BU356[K] BU357[K]
*26 ST1
*26/26
GS114-IOBUS-
*26/26
DISTRIB.
3 F8.9499.6020.X 100MA2 100MA1 3
ST319/RJ45
GS116-
1 A1 B1
EMERGENCY-NODE
2 A2 B2
3 A3 B3 F7.0486.1318.X
Adapter
4 A4 B4
ethernet
/PCI_RACK_300.3F 5 A5 B5 ETHERNET
F7.0477.1070.0 6 A6 B6
7 A7 B7
8 A8 B8
KEYPAD F7.5155.1623.0
Interlock
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F
F8.5155.4642.X
1 7 8 1
4
4 BU344 BU345
1 3 4 1
BU343 BU346 General Schematic Project
S101-INTERLOCK-RIGHT
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: FRAME_100 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 7
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
REVIVE GS632
-P27 -P2 F8.5148.1510.

3/3 1/3
1,5V -LD4#12
2/3 2/3
1,5V MPC5200-PLL -LD5#2
1/3 3/3
5V -LD1#12 -P1#15
*16/16 PM_1
-P38 -P5
1 N Power Supply 3.3V #5/48 #5/48 3,3V -LD2#12 1
CPCI-POWER-BD 8V #2/48 #2/48

2,5V MPC5200 -LD3#2
PE 24V #2/48 #2/48
GS630
-12V 4/48 d8/48 2,5V -LD5#12
L 15V 1/48 d2/48 -LD4#2 -P2#18
1,5V MPC5200 *8/8
-15V 5/48 d10/48 POLYGON-CRPL
1,2V FPGA -LD3#12
5.1V #10/48 #10/48
-P1 -ST12 -BU20 -P21
12V #2/48 #2/48 *64/64 *64/64 *64/64 *64/64 Offboard flash sel -LD2#2
GND #24/48 #24/48
Onboard flash sel -LD1#2 -P1#17
#10/20 RF-TAG_READER
USB 5V -LD1#5
Ethernet receive active -LD1#4
REVIVE-BACKPLANE
-BU13 -P3 -15V -LD19
F8.5148.1470. L L1 F8.5148.1415.0
-BU10 -ST10 -P2#17
Cross reference
1/1 BN 3/3
2
/sREVIVE.3B 3/3 *7/7 2
-A4
1/1 LD test -LD21#11 LCD-TERMINAL
power-rack
F8.5148.1450.
-BU14 -P3 -P1#2
-BU11 PE PE1 1/1 GNYE -ST10 2/3 *64/64 +24V ext -LD14#11
3A flash-prog
/sREVIVE.3B 1/1 250VAC
2/3
GS631
+8V off -LD13#11
-BU15 -P3
-BU12 N N1 1/1 BU -ST10 1/3
/sREVIVE.3B -15V ext -LD17
1/1
-ST363
1/3 -P1#18
#26/52 IO_BUS
GNYE
+15V ext -LD18
-BU16 -BU17
300PE4 +15V -LD20
BK
F8.5148.1475. -LD8#11
F8.5148.1770. +5V TAG
-BU18 -P4
2 -ST18 BK -ST11 2/2
BK -P1#18
2/2 2/2 ATA device slave present -LD1#3 #26/52
M
2/2 -P4 LD_MODUL

1 RD RD 1/2
1/2 FPGA ready -LD12
1/2 1/2
-M10
3 2 BK SLED 1 -LD13 3
M
1 RD SLED 2 -LD14 -P1#4

*8/8
ETHERNET
-W3 SLED 3 -LD15
-M11
40 pol. Flatcable
-BU21 -P1#3
#39/40 *39/39
SLED 4 -LD16
ST1
ST2
300 mA
300 mA -R2#7 -P1#17
-R1#16 #10/20 SERVICE
F8.5148.1485. -P33 -P25 RS232
Power
analog +/- 15V
X *4/4 *4/4
Harddisk T 1A -P1#5
Serial
4 pol. Connection Cable -F1
*4/4 P1/5 - USB-PORT
ST1
ST2
X
USB
for USB flash drive

-HDD2
F8.5148.1495.
4
4
VDE/UL/CSA 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
- part -
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
changes 1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
only with
approval 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: REVIVE_efer / 100
of
FT-LPS 0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 8
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F G H
1 1
-P45 -P39
3/3 1/3
2/3 2/3
1/3 3/3 1,5V -LD4#14
-P36 -P40 1,5V MPC5200-PLL -LD5#14

N Power Supply 3.3V #5/48 #5/48
8V 5V -LD1#17
CPCI-POWER-BD #2/48 #2/48 P1#15
PM_1
PE 24V #2/48 #2/48 3,3V -LD2#13 *16/16
GS630
-12V 4/48 d8/48
2,5V MPC5200 -LD3#14
2 L 15V 1/48 d2/48 2
-15V 5/48 d10/48 2,5V -LD5#13

5.1V #10/48 #10/48
1,5V MPC5200 -LD4#13 P2#18
12V #2/48 #2/48 POLYGON-CTRL
-LD3#13 *8/8
GND #24/48 #24/48 1,2V FPGA
-P46 -ST375 -BU29 P21 Offboard flash sel -LD2#14
*64/64 *64/64 *64/64
*64/64
Onboard flash sel -LD1#13 P1#17
RF-TAG_READER
USB 5V -LD1#15 #10/20
Ethernet receive active -LD1#16
REVIVE-BACKPLANE
-15V -LD29
F8.5148.1470. L -BU23 F8.5148.1415.0 -P42
-BU25 L1 -ST377
Cross reference
1/1 BN 3/3
/REVIVE_efer.2A 3/3 P2#17
-A9
1/1 LD test -LD21#12 LCD-TERMINAL
power-rack
*7/7
PE
-BU22 -P42 P1#2 +24V ext -LD14#12
3 -BU26 PE1 1/1 GNYE -ST377 2/3 3
F8.5148.1450.
3A flash-prog
/REVIVE_efer.2A 1/1 250VAC
2/3 *64/64 +8V off -LD13#12
GS631
-BU24 -P42
-BU27 N N1 1/1 BU -ST377 1/3
/REVIVE_efer.2A -15V ext -LD28
1/1 1/3 P1#18
-ST364 IO_BUS
GNYE
C102923
S5359 +15V ext -LD21 #26/52
-BU31 -BU28
300PE5 +15V -LD27 P1#18
LD_MODUL
BK
F8.5148.1475. #26/52
F8.5148.1770. +5V TAG -LD8#12
-BU32 -P41
2 BK -ST365 BK -ST376 2/2
2/2 2/2 ATA device slave present-LD1#14
M
2/2 -P41
-M13
1 RD RD 1/2
1/2 FPGA ready -LD26
1/2 1/2
2 BK SLED 1 -LD25
-M12
1 RD SLED 2 -LD24
4 P1#4 4
ETHERNET
P1#3 SLED 3 -LD23 *8/8
IDE
-39/39 SLED 4 -LD22
A604852. -BU37 P1
300 mA
7/7 300 mA -R2#8
7/7 P1#17
-R1#17 SERVICE
RS232 #10/20
-Serial analog +/- 15V
SATA HD 2,5"
A604861. T 1A -P1#21
-Power
A604853. -BU30 P25 -F2
*4/4 P1/5 - USB-PORT
4/4 4/4 USB for USB flash drive
sREVIVE
A800495.
5 GS640
5
6
6
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: sREVIVE / 100

Sheet 9
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

A B C D E F G H
M708
CPCI-RACK-FAN
M BU7 BU2
*3/3 *3/3
1 2 1 1
ST719 BU888 ST722 BU9
1 1 1 1/2
2 2 2 2/2
BU8 ST2
#48/50 #48/50
CPCI-POWER
F8.5146.1430.
GS307
BU905 MC303 BU903
L 1
L L1
BU882 BU889 ST4
POWER_RACK PE 3A 1 1 1/4
-P24
-P23
-P3#2
-P2#2
-P1#2
Debug *43/43
Debug *43/43
Debug *43/43
Boot Board *64/64
JTAG *10/10
250VAC 2/4
BU904 3 3/4 3J6
N 1 4 4/4 #135/137
2 N N1 2
-U17#2
-F1
-LD1#12
-R1#16
BU887 -LD1#2
PE107 1
-LD1#4
-LD1#5
-LD2#12
3J5 -LD2#2
#135/137 -LD3#12
-LD3#2
-LD4#12
-LD4#2
-LD5#12
-LD8#11
-LD12
-P1#15
-LD13 1/16
3 3
-LD13#11 2/16
8/16
-LD14 9/16
10/16
-LD14#11
15/16
-LD15 3/16
-LD16 4/16 PM_1
7/16
-LD17 11/16
2J5 12/16
#135/137 -LD18
14/16
-LD19 5/16
-LD20 6/16
13/16
-LD21 S/16
-LD21#11
-P2#18
POLYGON_CTRL
*8/8
4 -P1#17 4
2J6 #9/20 RF_READER
#135/137
SH1/20
-P2#17
LCD
*7/7
-P1#18
ST5 SATA HD 2,5" #25/52 I/O BUS
#34/36 -P1 HD SATA SH3/52
A604861.
*7/7
-P1#18
*4/4
#25/52 LD_MODULE
HD POW ER
-P25 SH1/52
5
5
BU3
1/4 -P1#4
-1J4 ETHERNET
2/4 #135/137 -P4 *8/8
3/4
4/4
*135/135 cRevive
A800630.
ST6 -1J2
#68/70 #135/137 GS650
-P1#17
P2/20
P3/20
P5/20
-1J1 P6/20
#135/137 -P10 SERVICE
P7/20
-S1#12
*135/135 P8/20
-S1#2
SH2/20
BACKPLANE
6
6 F7.0486.1342.0 *4/4
GS301 USB 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
-P1#5 General Schematic Project
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: cREVIVE / 100

Sheet 10
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS268.08M

CR35-X
Type 5158/100
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
CR 35-X CR 25.0
Type 5158/100 Type 5156/100/105
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
Edition 2, Revision 4 Document Node ID: 12403365

11-2014 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v11
DD+DIS268.08M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2014 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manuals refer to the
"List of Service Documents" in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 4 CR25.0 / CR35-X Chapter 5 / Page 2 of 72

11-2014 Type 5156/100/105, 5158/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 2.3
Revision Date
2.4 11-2014 Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated. Repaired Parts
(Prefix RF+) added.
DISCLAIMER:
Actual delivered spare parts may differ (in appearance) from the images shown and/or
ordered spare parts.
The codes of the ordered spare parts can vary from the code of the delivered spare parts.
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered spare parts have at least the same functionalities.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to deliver compatible or alternative spare parts.
Prices may differ from the original order as these spare parts will be invoiced at current prices.
NOTE:
Repaired Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or the producer / distributor
of this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering Worldwide: spareparts@agfa.com
Spare Parts returns Worldwide: returnsspareparts@agfa.com


Contents




01
02* 03*
05
06*
04*
07*
5158_CHAP05_01_M.CDR
PANELING


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item No. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+6060660 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
2 CM+9515512704 * SEITENWAND LINKS
SIDE WALL, LHS
PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE
3 CM+9515512501 * DECKEL
COVER
COUVERCLE
4 CM+9515612600 FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN
FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM - (TYPE 5156/100/105 ONLY)
PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS
4 CM+9515812600 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN
FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM - (TYPE 5158/100 ONLY)
PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS
5 CM+9515512631 FOLIENSCHARNIER
PLASTIC HINGE
CHARNIERE A MEMBRANE
6 CM+9515612100 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
7 CM+9515512403 * SEITENWAND RECHTS
SIDE WALL, RHS
PAROI LATERALE A DROITE
= Assembly
* = Spare Part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
PANELING


01*
02*
D3188
05
04*
D3188
D3188
03
FRONT PANELING, TOP


1 CM+9515612100 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
2 CM+9515551500 * KLAPPE MONTIERT
FLAP INSTALLED
VOLET INSTALLER
3 CM+9515551480 ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
4 CM+9515551901 * VERRIEGELUNG MONTIERT
LOCK INSTALLED
VERROUILLAGE INSTALLER
5 CM+9515512171 SCHAUMSTOFFSTREIFEN
FOAM PLASTIC STRIPE
BANDES EN MOUSSE
= Assembly
FRONT PANELING, TOP


01
(GS 114)
02 11
03
12
11
04
(S101)
10
(GS 116) 05
D969 (M501)
D333
09
13 D2222
D21
D85
06
D372
07
08 D86
(M 101)
D2771
5158_CHAP05_03_M.cdr
FRAME


1 CM+9949960202 GS 8FACH IO-VERTEILER (GS114)
GS 8-FOLD IO DISTRIBUTOR (GS114)
DISTRIBUTION OCTUPLE I / O (GS114)
2 CM+9515546280 KABEL FL/RD 26POL (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND 26POLE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CABLE PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
3 CM+9514616650 ETHERNET KABEL MIT STECKER
ETHERNET CABLE WITH CONNECTOR
CABLE ETHERNET AVEC CONNECTEUR
4 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S101)
SAFETY SWITCH (S101)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S101)
5 CM+9514636200 LÜFTER 24V VERDRAHTET (M501)
FAN 24V (M501)
VENTILATEUR 24V (M501)
6 CM+9037095110 RAD 65X12,1 (1 STCK.)
WHEEL 65X12,1 (1 PIECE)
ROUE 65X12,1 (1 PIÈCE)
7 CM+9037095090 LENKROLLEN (1 STCK.)
GUIDE ROLLER (1 PIECE)
ROUE GUIDE (1 PIÈCE)
8 CM+9515546600 LÜFTER 24V LE VERDR (M101)
FAN 24V LE (M101)
VENTILATEUR 24V LE (M101)
9 CM+9515516201 DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AFFICHEUR
9 RF+9515516201 DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AFFICHEUR
10 CM+9515548200 GS STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)
PCB STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)
CI ETAT NOEUD URGENCE (GS116)
11 CM+9047910140 ABSTANDSHALTER (10 STCK.)
SPACER (10 PIECES)
ECARTEUR (10 PIÈCES)
12 CM+9515646001 KABELBAUM GESTELL CR25.0
CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR25.0 - (TYPE 5156/100/105 ONLY)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR25.0
12 CM+9515846001 * KABELBAUM GESTELL CR35-X
CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR35-X - (TYPE 5158/100 ONLY)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR35-X
13 CM+6071300 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - LOCAL DISPLAY
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - LOCAL DISPLAY
= Assembly
FRAME


08
01
09*
02
03
(GS714)
04
(M704)
05 (GS718) 07
06
(GS728)
05
12
11
10 (M701)
CASSETTE UNIT PART 1


1 CM+9515550800 WINKEL
BRACKET
EQUERRE
2 CM+9038960000 ZAHNRIEMEN
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
3 CM+9515552400 KASSETTENHEBER
CASSETTE LIFT
ELEVATEUR DE CASSETTE
4 CM+9515552311 LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
5 CM+9514590100 LICHTSCHRANKE (GS718, GS728)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS718, GS728)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS718, GS728)
6 CM+9988905600 KABEL FL 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
7 CM+9037110110 KUGELBÜCHSE - 16X26X36
SPHERICAL LINER - 16X26X36
DOUILLE SPHERIQUE - 16X26X36
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
9 CM+9515550900 * RIEMENUMLENKUNG
CROSSOVER BELT
COUDAGE DE LA COURROIE
10 CM+9514551351 RÖLLCHENMOTOR (M701)
ROLLER MOTOR (M701)
MOTEUR DES GALETS (M701)
11 CM+9514591001 RÖLLCHEN
ROLLER
ROULEAU
= Assembly




1 CM+9515690501 ÖFFNER
OPENER
LOUP
2 CM+9515550424 FOLIENAUSRICHTUNG LINKS
FOIL ALIGNMENT, LHS
ALIGNEMENT A GAUCHE
3 CM+9515645181 KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
4 CM+9514659110 LICHTSCHRANKENFAHNE
LIGHT BARRIER LUG
CAVALIER DE PHOTO CELLULE
5 CM+9515670000 KASSETTENEINZUG ANSCHLAG LINKS (GS720)
CASSETTE FEED STOP, LHS (GS720)
INTRODUCTION DES CASSETTE A GAUCHE (GS720)
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
7 CM+9515550251 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE
8 CM+9515590100 LICHTSCHRANKE (GS730)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS730)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS730)
= Assembly


01
02 (GS736)
15
03 05
(GS738) (M702)
14 04
06
10
07 08
(GS716)
02
09
13
11
12
(GS726)


1 CM+9515590301 ANTENNENMECHANIK
ANTENNA MECHANISM
MACANISM DE L'ANTENNE
2 CM+9515552701 READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
2 RF+9515552701 READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
3 CM+9515645061 KABEL 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
4 CM+9515551200 MOTORWINKEL
MOTOR BRACKET
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR
5 CM+9514575501 SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG (M702)
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M702)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M702)
6 CM+9038961230 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X245
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X245
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X245
7 CM+9038960010 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X185
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X185
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X185
9 CM+9988905850 KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
10 CM+9510055030 SCHENKELFEDER
LEG SPRING
RESSORT A BRANCHES
11 CM+9515555800 SCHWENKPLATTE
SWIVEL PLATE
PLAQUE PIVOTANTE
12 CM+9515590401 GS LICHTSCHRANKE (GS726)
LIGHT BARRIER BOARD (GS726)
CI BARRIERE PHOTOELECTRIQUE (GS726)
14 CM+9515545080 KABEL 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
15 CM+6071270 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - RF-TAG READER
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - RF-TAG READER
= Assembly


01
(M705)
03 (GS724)
04
05
02
17
(M703)
15 14*
16
(GS734) 07
08 (GS722)
09
13 12
06
11
(M706) (GS732)
10


1 CM+9515650003 KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
1 RF+9515650003 KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
2 CM+9515653701 UMLENKEINHEIT
GUIDE UNIT
UNITÉ DE RENVOI
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
6 CM+9515591201 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUS
9 CM+9515545100 KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
10 CM+9515690201 SPINDELANTRIEB MIT MOTOR
SPINDLE DRIVE WITH MOTOR
COMMANDE VIS SANS FIN AVEC MOTEUR
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M706)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M706)
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
13 CM+9515650300 HALTERUNG SPINDEL
HOLDER
FIXATION
14 CM+9514551651 * ACHSE
SHAFT
AXE
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
16 CM+9514651450 MOTORWINKEL MONTIERT
MOTOR BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR ASSEMBLE
STEPPER MOTOR ASSY (M703)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. (M703)
= Assembly




1 CM+9949981407 GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB (GS712)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
2 CM+9515545042 KABEL BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
BUS CABLE 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
7 CM+9515545100 KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
10 CM+9949981301 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS710)
5 FOLD MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP
10 RF+9949981301 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP
5 FOLD MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP
= Assembly


01
02 03
D631
04
14 05 (M 601)
06
D38
16 05
13
05
12
D40
15 06
11
(GS 602)
09 07
10
D631
12
08
(GS 604)
D4340
TRANSPORT UNIT


1 CM+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
1 RF+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
2 CM+9515561155 LEITBLECH
GUIDE PLATE
TOLE DE GUIDAGE
3 CM+9515561101 LEITBLECH HINTEN
GUIDE PLATE, BACK
TOLE DE GUIDAGE ARRIERE
4 CM+9515560901 SCHRITTMOTOR (M601)
STEPPER MOTOR (M601)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS (M601)
5 CM+9037170040 ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
6 CM+9515542120 KABEL 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
7 CM+6060670 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
10 CM+9515542141 KABEL 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
11 CM+9515881500 SCHRITTMOTORKARTE (GS602)
MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB (GS602)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)
13 CM+9047913100 ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
14 CM+9515542102 KABEL BUS FL 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
FLAT CABLE 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
CABLE PLAT 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
15 CM+9515590700 ZAHNRIEMENRAD
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE
16 CM+9038961030 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
TOOTHED BELT, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT


01
02
02
X
X
06 05
(L=90mm)
06
(L=27mm)
08
03 06
(L=100mm)
02
06
(L=27mm)
Detail X 06
07 (L=65mm)
04 ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED

HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL
(SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E)
TRANSPORT UNIT


1 CM+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
1 RF+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
2 CM+9515592402 SAUGER KOMPLETT
SUCTION CUP COMPLETE
VENTOUSE COMPLET
3 CM+9515561304 PUMPENWINKEL
PUMP BRACKET
EQUERRE DE POMPE
4 CM+9515861301 PUMPENWINKEL (HI), VOLLSTÄNDIG ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED
PUMP BRACKET (HI) COMPLETE HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL
EQUERRE DE POMPE (HI) COMPLET (SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E)
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
6 CM+0000064155 SILIKONSCHLAUCH (INNENDURCHMESSER 3MM)
SILICON TUBE (INNER DIAMETER 3MM)
TUYAU SLICONE (DIAMÈTRE INTÉRIEUR 3MM)
7 CM+9515561480 DÜSE
NOZZLE
BUSE
8 CM+9036260940 FILTER MIT MIKROSIEB
FILTER WITH MICRO INSERT
FILTRE A MICRO-ORIFICES
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT


01*
D221
02
03
D353
D81
D2756
08
04
07
06
05
09
ERASURE UNIT


1 CM+9515635002 * LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
2 CM+9515635431 ARRETIERBLECH
RETAINING PLATE
PLAQUE DE RETENUE
3 CM+9515635600 HALTER, LAMPEN KOMPLETT
LAMP HOLDER COMPLETE
SUPPORT LAMPES COMPLET
4 CM+9514535440 KG2-FILTER
FILTER
FILTRE
5 CM+9515635851 FASSUNGSLEISTE VERKABELT
SOCKET BAR WITH CABLE
BARRETTE AVEC CABLE
6 CM+9045065740 FASSUNG 6,35 24V
SOCKET 6,35 24V
SOCLE 6,35 24V
7 CM+9045065530 HALOGENLAMPE, 12V 100W
HALOGEN LAMP, 12V 100W
LAMPE HALOGEN, 12V 100W
8 CM+9515535650 DISTANZLEISTE
SPACER RAIL
LITEAU D’ECARTEMENT
9 CM+6071310 KABELBAUM LÖSCHEINHEIT
CABLE HARNESS ERASURE UNIT
HARNAIS DE CABLE UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
= Assembly
ERASURE UNIT


SCAN UNIT PART 1


11-2014 Type 5156/105, 5158/100 Agfa Company Confidential
CR35-X
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination Type 5158/100
CR25.0
1 CM+9515524451 BOWDENZUG Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
2 CM+9515824251 BÜRSTENHALTEBLECH KOMPLETT
BRUSH STRIP COMPLETE
BAGUETTE A BROSSES COMPLET
3 CM+9515526502 ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
4 CM+9515821000 SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
5 CM+9514830800 PMT DETECTOR MIT LICHTSAMMLER
PMT WITH LIGHT COLLECTOR
DETECTEUR PMT
6 CM+6071260 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - PMT
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - PMT
7 CM+9514827003 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTICS MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
8 CM+6071250 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - OPTICS MODULE
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - OPTICS MODULE
9 CM+6071240 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - POLYGON
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - POLYGON
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 1


(GS 442)
02
(GS 444)
01
03
04
D707 05
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_13.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 1


11-2014 Type 5156/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Item No. Part No. Description CR25.0
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9515621000 SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
2 CM+9515591402 IR 2-FACH LICHTSCHRANKENSATZ
IR 2-WAY LIGHT BARRIER SET
JEU PHOTOCELLULE DOUBLE IR
3 CM+9515691300 ABLAGEBLECH OHNE LICHTSCHRANKEN
TRAY WITHOUT LIGHT BARRIER
RECEPTACLE SANS PHOTOCELL
4 CM+9515526502 ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
5 CM+9515621060 FEDERBLECH
SPRING METAL SHEET
TOLE ELASTIQUE A RESSORT
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 1


08 01
(GS 410) 02
07
03
04 (M 401)
08
(GS 412)
02
05
06
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000) 5158_CHAP05_14_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 2


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9988905200 KABEL FL 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1) Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
2 CM+9514526680 BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
3 CM+9515526701 ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
4 CM+9515526801 ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)
LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
5 CM+9515526600 SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
6 CM+9961124560 ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
7 CM+9515544362 KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
8 CM+9515521251 SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 2


10 01
(GS 450)
02
08
(GS 410) 03
09
08
(GS 412)
04
05
(M 401)
03
07
06
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_15_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 2


CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9514622504 PMT-MODUL (GS450)

PMT MODULE (GS450)
MODULE PMT (GS450)
1 CM+9514622550 PMT-MODUL - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
PMT MODULE - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
MODULE PMT - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
3 CM+9514526680 BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
4 CM+9515526701 ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
5 CM+9515526801 ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)
LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
6 CM+9515526600 SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
7 CM+9961124560 ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
8 CM+9515521251 SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
9 CM+9515544362 KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK
BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE
10 CM+9514827003 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTICS MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 2


01
(M402)
02
03
05 04 (GS444)
(GS 448)
06
07
(GS440) 08
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000) 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 3


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung CR35-X
Type 5158/100
CR25.0
1 CM+9514625100 SCHRITTMOTOR (M402) Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
2 CM+9514525900 KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
3 CM+9514526190 FÜHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
4 CM+9988905800 KABEL FL 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
5 CM+9949965402 GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
6 CM+9515590902 PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
7 CM+9515544341 KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
8 CM+9515544321 KABEL FL 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 3


01
(M402)
02
03
09
05 04 (GS 446)
(GS 448)
06
07
(GS 440) 08
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_17_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 3


CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9514625100 SCHRITTMOTOR (M402)

2 CM+9514525900 KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
3 CM+9514526190 FÜHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
5 CM+9949965402 GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
6 CM+9515590902 PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
7 CM+9515544341 KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL
FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL
8 CM+9515544321 KABEL FL 10/8/4POL
FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL
9 CM+9515524451 BOWDENZUG
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 3


CPCI-RACK


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9514614250 LÜFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM (M300) Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)
2 CM+9514614402 EINSCHUB STORAGE KOMPLETT (GS302, GS304)
PLUG-IN MODULE STORAGE COMPLETE (GS302, GS304)
TIROIR STORAGE COMPLET (GS302, GS304)
3 CM+9048613651 DISKETTENLAUFWERK 3,5"
FLOPPY-DISK-DRIVE 3,5"
LECTEUR 3,5"
4 CM+9048613540 SCSI FESTPLATTE
SCSI HARDDISK
SCSI DISQUE DUR
5 CM+9048613570 SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
6 CM+9514818501 REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
7 CM+9515516352 VME GLEITBAHN GENIETET
VME SLIDE TRACK
RAIL GLISSANT VME
8 CM+9515546700 KABEL NETZ-VME
POWER CABLE
CORDON D’ALIMENTATION
9 CM+9514614653 EINSCHUB IO-MASTER (GS310)
PLUG-IN MODULE IO-MASTER (GS310)
TIROIR IO-MASTER (GS310)
10 CM+9514615014 OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
11 CM+9048613420 CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
12 CM+6062840 C REVIVE EINSCHUB KOMPLETT
C REVIVE PLUG IN COMPLETE
TIROIR C REVIVE COMPLET
13 CM+6062850 SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
19 CM+6071330 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
= Assembly
CPCI-RACK


CPCI-RACK


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000)
CR25.0
20 CM+9515888103 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206
Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)
= Assembly
CPCI-RACK


REVIVE RACK


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9515817100 REVIVE-RACK OHNE BOARD Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)
REVIVE-RACK WITHOUT PCB
REVIVE-RACK SANS CIRCUIT IMPRIMÉ
2 CM+9514817600 LUEFTER MIT WINKEL (M300)
FAN BRACKET (M300)
VENTILATEUR (M300)
3 CM+9514818501 REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
4 CM+9514818002 S-REVIVE BOARD
S-REVIVE PCB
CIRCUIT IMPRIMÉ S-REVIVE
5 CM+9048614280 IDE HARD DISK
IDE HARD DISK
IDE HARD DISK
6 CM+6062850 SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
7 CM+9514814900 CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
8 CM+9515888103 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206
10 CM+6071330 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
15 CM+9514814500 REVIVE RUECKWAND
REVIVE BACKPLANE
PLAQUE ARRIÈRE REVIVE
= Assembly
REVIVE RACK


01
10
02
09 (GS210)
11
(GS220)
03
12
(TR206) 10 04
13 (S203)
(SI1-SI4) 17
15
16
(GS230)
D707
D2182 14
D5681 (SI5)
08 D707
(SI201) 07
(SI202)
D707 D707
D3227
06 05
(S201) (S202)
5158_CHAP05_20_M.cdr
POWER UNIT


1 CM+9515864000 LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
1 RF+9515864000 LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
2 CM+9515591106 GS SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)
PCB SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)
CI COMMUTATION UNIT D'EFFACEMENT (GS210)
3 CM+9043660590 NETZFILTER 250V/16A
MAINS FILTER 250V/16A
FILTRE RÉSEAU 250V/16A
4 CM+9515541300 KB WAHLSCHALTER (S203)
SELECTOR SWITCH (S203)
SELECTEUR (ELECTRIQUE) (S203)
5 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S202)
SAFETY SWITCH (S202)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S202)
6 CM+9045231730 ÜBERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 14A (S201)
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 14A (S201)
DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 14A (S201)
7 CM+9515691000 NETZTEIL 90-264V/24V-1A
POWER SUPPLY, 90-264V/24V-1A
BLOC SECTEUR, 90-264V/24V-1A
8 CM+9045196090 SICHERUNG T 2A (SI201, SI202)
FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A (SI201, SI202)
INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A (SI201, SI202)
9 CM+9515664800 TRAFOWINKEL
TRANSFORMER BRACKET
EQUERRE POUR TRANSFORMATEUR
11 CM+9515564401 GS CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
PCB CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
CI CONTROLE COURANT (GS220)
12 CM+9515664050 TRANSFORMATOR XBF (TR206)
TRANSFORMER (TR206)
TRANSFORMATEUR (TR206)
13 CM+9045196040 SICHERUNG T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
FUSE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
FUSIBLE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
14 CM+9045197050 SICHERUNG T 6,25A (SI5)
FUSE T 6,25A (SI5)
FUSIBLE T 6,25A (SI5)
15 CM+9047910160 ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
16 CM+9515664503 GS POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)
PCB POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)
CI CARTE INTEGRATION PUIS (GS230)
17 CM+9515541900 KABEL BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
BUS CABLE 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
= Assembly
POWER UNIT


MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES


1 CM+9515510152 CU-FILTER VERPACKT
CU FILTER PACKED
FILTER CU EMBALLE
2 CM+9514810900 ALU FILTER VERPACKT
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
3 CM+9515885101 REPARATUR - SORTIMENT
REPAIR - KIT
REPAIR - KIT
4 CM+9515885200 LOKALES - SORTIMENT
LOCAL - KIT
LOCAL - KIT
5 CM+9515885301 WARTUNGS - SORTIMENT
MAINTENANCE - KIT
MAINTENANCE - KIT
99 CM+9515595002 MOBILEKIT
MOBILE KIT
KIT MOBILE
= Assembly
MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR / SR 35X35 CM


11-2014 TYPE 8304/780 Agfa Company Confidential
1 10+9999912900 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X35 CM
2 10+9999912910 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 35X35 CM
3 CM+6045910 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X35 CM
4 CM+6045920 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 35X35 CM
5 CM+9999911460 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35 CM
6 CM+9830461304 CHIPKARTENHALTER, KOMPL.
CHIP CARD HOLDER, COMPLETE
PORTE CARTE PUCE, COMPLET
7 CM+9830461600 * DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
8 CM+9830460300 * BODEN VOLLSTÄNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
9 CM+9830030702 RIEGEL RECHTS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
VERROU A DROITE COMPLET
10 CM+9830030802 RIEGEL LINKS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
VERROU A GAUCHE COMPLET
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
12 CM+9830010340 UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
14 CM+9830010440 SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
15 CM+9830430110 SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9830010552 ABWEISER BESCHICHTET
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
17 CM+9830010381 BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE
18 CM+9830010391 BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE
19 CM+9830011310 ALULABEL (FILMERKENNUNG)
ALU LABLE (FILM DETECTION)
ETIQUETTE ALU (DETECTION DE FILM)
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09
5158_chap05_51_m.CDR
CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR 24X30 CM


2 10+9999911940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 24X30 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


2 10+9999911950 CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR 10"X12"


1 10+9999912940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 10X12"
2 CM+6045950 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 10X12"
3 CM+9999911470 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
5 CM+9830861600 * DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


1 10+9999912810 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 8X10"
2 10+9999912780 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 8X10"
3 CM+9999911480 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 8X10"
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


3 10+9999912790 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 15X30 CM
4 CM+9831661302 CHIPKARTENHALTER
CHIP CARD HOLDER
PORTE CARTE PUCE
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM COMPLETE
FOND COMPLET
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


03,04
05 01,02
06
07*
16
08*
15
17
19 09
18
14
11
12
13
13
10 12
11


2 10+9999911960 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X43 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR35X43 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR35X43 CM
4 10+9999911930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X43 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


CASSETTE CR MD4.1 FLFS 35X43 CM


1 CM+9832008100 FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD4.1 FLFS 35X43 CM


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM / SYM


11-2014 TYPE 8320/785/790 Agfa Company Confidential
1 10+9999912920 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
2 10+9999912930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
3 CM+6045930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
4 CM+6045940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD4.0 PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM / SYM


11-2014 TYPE 8320/785/790 Agfa Company Confidential
CASSETTE CR MM3.0 MAMMO / EXTREMITIES 18X24 CM


1 10+9999912130 CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
2 10+9999912400 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 18X24 CM
3 10+9999912170 CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
4 10+9999912380 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 18X24 CM
5 10+9999912150 CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
7 CM+9833061402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9833012200 PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
17 CM+9833060600 DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
= Assembly




1 10+9999912140 CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 24X30 CM
2 10+9999912410 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 24X30 CM
3 10+9999912180 CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30 CM
4 10+9999912390 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 24X30 CM
5 10+9999912160 CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 24X30 CM
7 CM+9833161402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9833012200 PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
17 CM+9833060600 DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
= Assembly


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type Number Order Code

CR 25.0 5156/0105 -----
CR 25.0 5156/0100 EOV3F
CR 35-X 5158/0100 ES9MZ
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order Number

CR MOBILE KIT EBYO1
PROSAT WIPES (3 X 30 WIPES) ETRTM
CR ID TABLET EPKAP
CR HUB EPZVG
CR EASYLIFT EJ8V8
CR FULL BODY CASSETTE HOLDER EAUGV
CR PLANFELD GRID 37.6 X 128.2 CM ECJ8M
CR ANTISCATTER GRID VERSION 2 EMUXJ
CR PHOSPHOR IP CLEANER 4P EFOJH
CR PHOSPHOR IP CLEANER 2P EQP6D
CR UPS 220 VOLT EGPTG
CR UPS 110 VOLT EGPSE
CR 35-X (CR 25.0) HIGH ALT KIT EZKDB
CR 85-X (CR 75.0) HIGH ALT KIT EZKFF
POLYNIT WIPES 5PCZF


DD+DIS074.04E Accessories
List of Contents
Edition Revision Order Number Contents

1 0 DD+DIS074.04E Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit
Edition 1, Revision 0 CR 25.0 Chapter 6

HEALTHCARE Accessories
Order-No.: DD+DIS074.04E
CR 25.0
*1WRR631*
1 Piece WRR63 MA1
Type 5156 / 100
Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit

Type 5155 / 153
CM+9.5155.9500.0
This fitting instruction is also enclosed to the accessory.
This document describes the installation of the Mobile Kit, which is

necessary to fix the digitizer on deck when in mobile use.
Necessary time:
approx. 1 hour
Necessary tools:
• 5 mm allen key
• 6 mm allen key
• 7 mm socket wrench
• 10 mm wrench
• 13 mm wrench

Accessories DD+DIS074.04E
List of contents
1 General Information ................................................. 3

1.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 3
1.2 Scope of Delivery .................................................................... 3
1.3 Preparation .............................................................................. 3
2 Installation Procedure .............................................. 4

2.1 Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket ......................................... 4
2.2 Adjust the Ground Plate ......................................................... 4
2.3 Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket .......... 5
2.4 Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer.............................. 5
2.5 Fix the Digitizer to the wall ..................................................... 6
2.6 Security Fix of the Scan Unit.................................................. 7

1 General Information
1.1 Introduction
Provided with a mobile kit the Digitizer can be installed in a van, in a container
or in a vessel. This mobile installation kit is used to fix the machine on deck.
Mobile Kit:
Type Number: 5155 / 153
ABC Code: EBYO1
Spare Parts No.: CM+ 9.5155.9500.0
1.2 Scope of Delivery
• 1 safety bar with screw (1). (3)

(1)
• 1 mounting block (2). (2)
• 1 wall mounting bracket (4)

with 2 quick action locks (3).
(5)
• 1 bolt with split pin (4).
• 1 mounting bracket to be fixed

to the digitizer (6 screws) (5).
5155P1-B.CDR
• 1 ground plate with mounting

(6)
bracket (6).
• 1 set of installation instructions.
5155P1-C.CDR
1.3 Preparation
• Examine thoroughly the path along which the Digitizer has to be moved
until it reaches its final location, to guarantee sufficient space to pass all the
doors.
• Make sure that the final location is solid enough to carry the Digitizer.
Read carefully the Installation Planning Instructions, chapter 11.

2 Installation Procedure
2.1 Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket
• Remove the side panels of the
Digitizer.
• Loosen the paneling screws on
the rear of the Digitizer. Take care
that none of the elements fixing
the paneling screw (1 small and 1
large washer, 1 retaining ring, 1
nut) can fall into the digitizer. The
scan unit may be damaged.
• Fix the mounting block to the
Digitizer with a 5 mm allen key. 5155P2-A.CDR
Please use the two screw sets
supplied, consisting of 1 allen
screw, 1 washer, 1 retaining ring
and one nut each.
• Fix the mounting block to the wall
mounting bracket with the quick
action locks.
2.2 Adjust the Ground Plate

• Position the ground plate as close
as possible to the place where the
Digitizer is expected to remain
located.
• Move the Digitizer onto the
ground plate.
• Insert the bolt into the guide slot
of the mounting bracket provided
to fix the Digitizer on the ground
plate.
5155P1-C.CDR
• Make sure that the mounting
block touches the wall mounting
bracket.
• The mounting bracket of the
ground plate should be

approximately in the middle

position while the screws are not
fixed. Now the ground plate is in
the perfect position.
• Mark the corners of the ground
plate with a pencil.
2.3 Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket
• Remove the bolt from the guide

slot and move the Digitizer down
from the ground plate.
• Select a minimum of 4 holes in
the ground plate where you want
to fix it to the floor. You may be
guided by the conditions of the
floor where the Digitizer is being
located.
• Fix the ground plate to the floor.
• Select a minimum of 4 holes in
the wall mounting bracket. You
may be guided by the conditions
of the wall where the Digitizer is
being fixed.
• Fix the wall mounting bracket to
the wall.
• Examine the solidness of the
fixed wall mounting bracket and
the fixed ground plate.
2.4 Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer

• Lift the Digitizer to an angle which
allows you to fix the mounting
bracket to the digitizer. Use the
10 mm wrench to fix the mounting
bracket tightly (6 screws).
5155P3-A.CDR

2.5 Fix the Digitizer to the wall

• Move the Digitizer onto the
ground plate again and insert the
mounting block into the wall
mounting bracket.
• Connect the mounting block to

the wall mounting bracket with the
quick action locks again. Now
screw the quick action locks to
the perfect length. The perfect
length is reached when the lock
snaps softly into the locking
position.
• Insert the bolt into the guide slot

and the mounting bracket of the
digitizer. This locks the Digitizer to
the ground plate.
• Attach the split pin to the provided
hole of the bolt.
• Fix the 4 screws thoroughly to
connect the mounting bracket
firmly to the ground plate.

2.6 Security Fix of the Scan Unit

If the Digitizer is being used in
a mobile location, the scan
unit has to be fixed
additionally.
• Insert the safety bar into
the provided guides and
fix it with the 7 mm socket
wrench.

Imaging Services Field Modifications
CR 25.0
Type 5156
► Content of Chapter 7: Field Modifications

This chapter contains the instructions for all modifications due to technical changes
since production start:
Document No. Contents Edition.

Revision
DD+DIS384.04E Installation Instructions for 1.2

Digitizer Software c25_1006


eq_07_field-mod_toc_e_template_v02
DD+DIS384.04E Field Modifications
List of Contents
Edition Revision Order Number Contents

1 2 DD+DIS384.04E Installation Instructions for Device
Software CR25_1006
Edition 1, Revision 2 CR 25.0 Chapter 7

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5156 / 100)
HEALTHCARE Field Modifications
CR 25.0
*1YDP3H1*
1 Piece YDP3H MA1
Type 5156 / 100
Installation Instructions for Device

Software C25_1006
This document provides general information on device software C25_1006

as well as the installation instructions.
Necessary time:
approx. 30 min

Field Modifications DD+DIS384.04E
List of Contents
1 General ....................................................................... 1
1.1 Software Requirements .......................................................... 1
1.2 Release Environment .............................................................. 1
1.3 Order number .......................................................................... 1
2 Upgrade Procedure to C25_1006 ............................. 2

2.1 Installation on an already installed system / upgrading an
older software version ............................................................ 2
2.2 Installation on a virgin Hard Disk........................................... 2
3 What is new in C25_1006?........................................ 4
4 Known Bugs in C25_1006......................................... 4

4.1 Bugs in Customer Functionality ............................................ 4
4.2 Bugs in Service Functionality ................................................ 5

(Type 5156 / 100) Agfa Company Confidential
1 General
1.1 Software Requirements
On the ADC QS Workstation use QS software version 2.1.68 or higher.
For Mammo application the dedicated mammo image processing software

(M1.0.5) has to be installed on top of the regular QS software!
1.2 Release Environment
This software version is released for following applications:
Application Released? Comment

GenRad YES
Mammo YES Previous software versions must not
be used for Mammo, because
Mammo cassettes are not erased
with the correct erasure dose and
Mammo cassettes are not rejected
in case of Direct-ID or emergency
(see details in chapter "Release
Info")!
GenRad 50µm NO necessary additional cassette codes
(Extremities, Pediatrics) are not defined yet
FLFS NO implemented, but not tested yet
(Full Leg - Full Spine)
Radiotherapy NO necessary additional cassette codes
are not defined yet
1.3 Order number

CM+ 9 5156 1080 x
• 1 C25_1006 software kit

• 1 empty floppy disk for backup
• 1 language disk (holds the language files)
• 1 upgrade instructions (DD+DIS384.04E)

2 Upgrade Procedure to C25_1006
2.1 Installation on an already installed system / upgrading an older

software version
For this normal installation procedure only use the application software disks
C251006_1_3 to C251006_3_3.
• Make a backup of the machine specific data

• Select
<Service Menu>
<Install from floppy>
<Software>
• Follow the online instructions and install application software disks
C251006_1_3 to C251006_3_3.
• After installation of the last floppy reboot the system.
• Renew the backup
2.2 Installation on a virgin Hard Disk
(1) Take the floppy Hard disk formatter / Portex Installer 1/2 and insert it
into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the digitizer from the network (since a default IP-Address &
hostname is configured)
(3) Connect a PC with terminal program or a terminal to service RS232 port
(9600 baud, Xon/Xoff, no parity, 8 bit, 1 stop bit).
(4) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on of the digitizer.
(5) Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk on your terminal with ‘y’.
(6) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal, or wait until control
LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(7) Insert the floppy Hard disk formatter / Portex Installer 2/2 into the disk
drive of the digitizer.
(10) Remove the floppy.
ATTENTION: Do not insert any other floppy!
(12) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal or wait approximately
2 minutes.

(13) Insert the first floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled C251006_1_3)
(15) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal or wait until control
(16) Insert the second floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled
C251006_2_3) into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(19) Insert the third floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled C251006_3_3)
(22) Remove the floppy, press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power
off/on of the digitizer and wait approx. 2 minutes (system extracts software
release)
(23) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on of digitizer and
wait until system is up.
Do not forget to restore test images from CDROM CM+9 5145 1055 0 after
the restore procedure.

3 What is new in C25_1006?
• If a Mammo cassette is erased only by pressing the "ERASE" key before

putting the cassette into the input slot, the image plate will be erased
with the correct Mammo erasure dose (750 mR). In previous Software
versions the normal GenRad erasure dose was used erroneously!
• Unidentified Mammo cassettes are rejected, if a speed-class key is
pressed for Direct-ID or emergency mode; the message "CASSETTE
IDENTIFICATION ERROR" is displayed in this case.
4 Known Bugs in C25_1006
4.1 Bugs in Customer Functionality
• Minor text discrepancies

• Faulty translations or format discrepancies in language files
• System check/snapshot: test of light barrier GS734/GS732-CASS-IN-
DET-LS does not work correctly (connection test unreliably, status test
incorrect)
• Infocounter: "Machine Running Time" values "Since last power-on" and
"Average hours / day" are not calculated correctly
• Machine is blocked in service mode, if fatal error occurred (e.g. a 2nd
shading calibration cycle is not possible, if calibration failed with
"collimation error")
• If test program "diag" is running simultaneously to automatic
snapshot/system-check in case of a fatal error, then the test result can
be incorrect (synchronisation is missing, test must not run several times
in parallel!)
• Automatic snapshot/system-check runs in parallel to failed service menu
functions; this can cause invalid test system test results
• If BOS sensor does not detect the IP correctly during erasing (error
247AA), the IP is transported down to the scanner, lost and possibly
scratched in the scanning unit.
• Pressing the same speed-class key again does not switch off
emergency/Direct-ID mode.

4.2 Bugs in Service Functionality
• PMT warning "SAL/Peak-to-Peak not OK" can be entered in the

infocounter, if an IP is exposed with high dose:
Because the PMT sensitivity self-test is done if the IP passes the PMT
on the way back from the scanning unit to the erasure unit, it influences
the PMT self-test result.
If you find such warnings in the infocounter, check the image quality
before replacing the PMT; if the image quality is OK and the customer
makes high-dose exposures, forget the warnings and do not replace the
PMT!
• Minor text discrepancies
• Some error descriptions are wrong (e.g. description describes a problem
with the galvanometer although a polygon is used); same as in CR75.0

CR 25.0
*1YNCJ21*
1 Piece YNCJ2 MA1
Type 5156 / 100

Software C25_1008
This document provides general information on device software C25_1008

as well as the installation instructions.
Necessary time:
approx. 30 min

List of Contents
1 General.......................................................................................... 1
1.1 Software Requirements ..................................................................................1
1.2 Release Environment ......................................................................................1
1.3 Order number...................................................................................................1
1.4 Scope of Delivery ............................................................................................1
2 Upgrade Procedure to C25_1008 ............................................... 2

2.1 Installation on an already installed system / upgrading
an older software version ...............................................................................2
2.2 Installation on a virgin Hard Disk...................................................................2
3 What is new in C25_1008? .......................................................... 4
4 Known Bugs in C25_1008 ........................................................... 5

1 General
On the ADC QS Workstation use QS software version 2.1.68 or higher.
For Mammo application the dedicated mammo image processing software

(M1.0.5) has to be installed on top of the regular QS software!

GenRad YES
Mammo YES Software versions prior to
C25_1006 must not be used for
Mammo
GenRad 50µm NO necessary additional cassette codes
(Extremities, Pediatrics) are not defined yet
FLFS YES
are not defined yet
1.3 Order number

CM+ 9 5156 1080 1


2 Upgrade Procedure to C25_1008
2.1 Installation on an already installed system / upgrading an older

software version
For this normal installation procedure only use the application software disks
C251008_1_3 to C251008_3_3.
• Make a backup of the machine specific data

• Select
<Service Menu>
<Install from floppy>
<Software>
• Follow the online instructions and install application software disks
C251008_1_3 to C251008_3_3.
• After installation of the last floppy reboot the system.
• Renew the backup
hostname is configured)
(12) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal or wait approximately
2 minutes.

(13) Insert the first floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled C251008_1_3)
(16) Insert the second floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled
(19) Insert the third floppy of the CR25.0 Application (labelled C251008_3_3)
(22) Remove the floppy, press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power
off/on of the digitizer and wait approx. 2 minutes (system extracts software
release)
(23) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on of digitizer and
wait until system is up.
Do not forget to restore test images from CDROM CM+9 5145 1055 0 after
the restore procedure.

• System check/snapshot: test of light barrier GS734/GS732-CASS-IN-

DET-LS connection is skipped in system check – it is electronically
impossible to check the sensor. The light barrier state is given correctly.
• Pressing the same speed-class key again, toggles the
Emergency/Direct-ID mode.
• The Keyoperator mode does not flash red anymore unless ‘Install’ or
‘Save configuration’ is selected.
• After software installation ‘Confirm Installation’ pops up after each
digitizer start, until the installation has been confirmed.
• Keyoperator Æ Save configuration shows ‘graphical’ disk label to
improve screen readability.
• Keyoperator Æ Date and time: date can now be entered correctly.
• Pressing any key during error beeping does only switch off the actual
beeping; it does not disable the beeping for the rest of the session.
Disabling the beeping permanently is only possible through menu
Keyoperator Æ Setup Æ Acoustic Signal.
• Scrolling arrows in ‘Show error’ are now displayed correctly and no
longer hiding information.
• Keyoperator mode is left, if cassette is entered.
• FLFS (Full Leg / Full Spine) application can be turned on/off.
• New and improved screen flow and texts for shading calibration.
• Menu Service Æ ‘Confirm modification’ implemented.
• Machine is no longer blocked in service mode, if fatal error occurred
(e.g. a 2nd shading calibration cycle is now possible, if calibration failed
with ‘collimation error’).
• The automatic snapshot/system check will not be executed, if an error
occurs during service mode to prevent problems with simultaneously
running service functions. Caution: There is no automatic snapshot
during test cycles started from the service menu anymore.
• The start page of the web interface shows a new CR25.0 image.
• Service Report Logging is completed and corrected.
• Handling of ‘to be erased’ cassettes improved in IPC and Shading
calibration.
• Infocounter: "Machine Running Time" values "Since last power-on" and
"Average hours / day" are calculated correctly now, if Manufacturer Date
and Installation Date is entered correctly.

• Some faulty translations or format discrepancies in language files.

• If BOS sensor does not detect the IP correctly during erasing (error
247AA), the IP is transported down to the scanner, lost and possibly
scratched in the scanning unit. (refer to FSB No. 1 - DD+DIS372.04E)
• Unplugging the network cable during image transmission is not detected
due to an error in the used DTF library.
• After an emergency scan the message indicating emergency stays on
display for 60 seconds.
• Working with freshly initialized cassettes is generally a problem due to a
QS misbehaviour. This problem will be solved via workaround in next
software version.
• PMT warning "SAL/Peak-to-Peak not OK" can be entered in the
infocounter, if an IP is exposed with high dose:
The PMT sensitivity self-test is done, if the IP passes the PMT on the
way back from the scanning unit to the erasure unit. This influences the
PMT self-test result.
If you find such warnings in the infocounter, check the image quality
before replacing the PMT. If the image quality is OK and the customer
makes high-dose exposures, do not replace the PMT!
• Few wrong error descriptions (e. g. description describes a problem with
the galvanometer although a polygon is used); same as in CR75.0.

CR 25.0
*1YZV9O1*
1 Piece YZV9O MA1
Type 5156/100

Software CR25_1020
This modification instruction is also enclosed to the modification kit.
The new software CR25_1020 supports the extremities functionality in

50 µm mode.
SW requirements: CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher
time needed to do the installation:

approximately 30 min

The readers should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
printed in Germany 2005-10-05
List of Contents
1 Digitizer Software C25_1020 .................................... 1

1.1 Software Requirements .......................................................... 1
1.2 Release Environment .............................................................. 1
1.3 Order Number .......................................................................... 1
2 Installation Procedure for C25_1020 ....................... 2

2.1 Installation on an already installed System /
Upgrading an older Software Version ................................... 2
2.2 Installation on a virgin Hard Disk........................................... 2
2.3 Installation of the CPF Configuration File ............................. 4
3 What is new in C25_1020?........................................ 5

3.1 Changes in Customer Functionality ...................................... 5
3.2 Changes in Service Functionality .......................................... 5
4 Known Bugs in C25_1020......................................... 6

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5156/100) 2005-10-05
1 Digitizer Software C25_1020
Use CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher (required for Extremities

application).
For Mammo application the dedicated Mammo image processing software has
to be installed.

GenRad YES
Mammo YES software versions prior to C25_1006
must not be used for Mammo
GenRad 50 µm YES software versions prior to C25_1020
(Extremities) must not be used for Extremities
FLFS YES
are not defined yet
1.3 Order Number
Digitizer software C25_1020: CM+ 9 5156 1080 2


2005-10-05 (Type 5156/100) Agfa Company Confidential
2 Installation Procedure for C25_1020
A new Portex Version (2004.05) accompanies this release C25_1020 which

resolves some operating system errors.
Installation as described in 2.2, Installation on a virgin Hard Disk, is
mandatory.
The error message “startup.com could not be found”, may indicate

that the floppy disk cannot be read.
Tip: remove and re-insert floppy, then reset the digitizer
2.1 Installation on an already installed System / Upgrading an older

Software Version
(1) Make a backup of the machine specific data.
(2) Perform installation according to installation instructions on a virgin hard

disk (see 2.2).
(3) Restore system data from your backup.
(4) Reboot the system.
hostname is configured).

(4) Press the Reset button on CPU board or turn power of the digitizer
off/on.

off/on.

(11) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on of the
digitizer.
(12) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal or wait
approximately 2 minutes.
(13) Insert the first floppy of the CR 25.0 Application (labeled C251020_1_3)
off/on.
(16) Insert the second floppy of the CR 25.0 Application (labeled

off/on.
(19) Insert the third floppy of the CR 25.0 Application (labeled

off/on.

(22) Remove the floppy, press the Reset button on CPU board or turn power
of the digitizer off/on and wait approx. 2 minutes (system extracts
software release).
(23) Press the Reset button on CPU board or turn power of digitizer off/on
and wait until the system is up.
(24) Press ∨ to confirm the installation.
(25) Reconnect the digitizer to the network.
If you exchanged the hard disk, restore the original device-specific

parameters by using the backup floppy. Follow the guidelines of the Service
Menu Topic Install from floppy, Machine specific data.
Take care to use the right backup disk for the digitizer in the backup restore
procedure.
(A backup disk with the original Machine Specific Data is available for any
machine from production in case of loss or fault).
CAUTION: Without restoring the device specific parameters, an operation is

impossible!
Do not forget to restore the test images from CDROM CM+9 5145 1055 0
after the restore procedure.
2.3 Installation of the CPF Configuration File
(1) Make sure the digitizer is disconnected from the network (never connect
the digitizer to the network before configuring it with a valid CPF file!).
(2) Generate the CPF file with the QS, the VIPS or the CCM.
(3) Parse the CPF file using the guidelines of the Service Menu Topic Install
from floppy, CPF file follow the instructions displayed on the user
interface.
(6) Refresh your backup by following the guidelines of Service Menu Topic
Save on floppy, Machine specific data.


3.1 Changes in Customer Functionality
• Extremity scanning is supported

• HITs (Half-Invalid-Tags) from the QS software are treated more
gracefully
• Scanner errors are displayed now
• Language Updates: Finnish, Spanish, French, Italian, and Dutch
• Reset is requested after installation of a new CPF file
• Switching the digitizer on/offline in the key-operator setup still requests
backup floppy
• Correct DICOM UIDs are sent to the processing station
• Modified white border detection algorithm, white border warnings are
written to the infocounter
• Scanner warning 20433. The error was caused by a system message
from Portex to the serial output. This blocked interrupts for a too long
time and caused the FIFO overflow. The code has been modified to
avoid this message.
3.2 Changes in Service Functionality
• The menu Website/Show Info/User Terminal Messages includes an

actual copy of the screen now, not a recreation
• The menu Website/Show Info/User Terminal Messages includes a
status light now
• The menu Website/Checks has been refined, especially the System
Check
• Calibration (Screen) Flow (Shading/IPC) finally refined
• “Mammo enabled” flag will not be overwritten by a new CPF file
• System Check will no longer move any motors
• System Check/Scanner timeouts has been refined to allow scanner to
perform jitter tests even if service error occurred during startup
• System Check does not skip all of the tests if PCI board or IOBUS are
missing
• Snapshot does include a screen shot and the AOS log file
• The infocounter file logs the usage of cassettes and formats in
dependency of scan resolution (.SR, .Mammo, .Extremity)
• The infocounter receives entries for user errors

• White border detection has been bugfixed

• PM sensitivity test now happens at the beginning of first scan
• Tag reader timeout changed from 5 minutes to 30 seconds
• Sending test images for Extremity enabled (Foldername in TIG0 Æ
‘extremity’, Sending in Service Æ CHECKS Æ Send image)
• Display of calibration screen has been bugfixed.
• „Cassette Identification Error“ displayed by mistake

Situation: Missing calibration line
The display first reports the correct error message. When the scan cycle
is being stopped then, the additional error message “Cassette
Identification Error” appears: This additional error is irrelevant.
• Cassette blocked in digitizer when entering wrong cassette format
for extremities calibration
The cassette will be blocked in the digitizer, if a wrong cassette format is
inserted for extremities calibration (Service Menu/Configure) and you
then press Cancel.
A manual removal of the cassette is necessary.
• The displayed option “GenRad (50 µ)” is without function
The menu item for extremities, GenRad (50 µ), present in
Service Menu/Configure/Add-on application, is without function.
Do not try to use this menu item; the extremities settings are already
done in item 1 “Mammo”.
• Defective lamps in erasure unit
Service 24726 displayed as user message when all erasure lamps are
defective. This message should read “All erasure lamps blown”.

Imaging Services
CR 25.0
Type 5156
Installation Instructions for

Digitizer Software C25_2007

This document
• gives upgrade installation instructions in case a previous software version is
installed on the digitizer.
• gives installation instructions on a virgin hard disk in case the hard disk has been
exchanged previously.

Revision Date
1.0 12-2006 • Initial Release
Document Title
Preceding Bulletin Service Bulletin No. 13, DD+DIS320.06E
REQUIRED TIME:
approximately 30 min.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.

eq_07_field-modifications_e_template_v01
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety
Directions" and on the product.


Agfa Company Confidential Type 5156 12-2006
List of Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................1
1.1 Software Requirements.................................................................................. 1
1.2 Order Number.................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Scope of Delivery............................................................................................ 1
1.4 Prerequisites 2
1.5 Release Information for C25_2007 ................................................................ 2
2 Installation Procedure for C25_2007 ..........................................3

2.1 Upgrading from an older Software Version.................................................. 3
2.2 Installation on a virgin Hard Disk .................................................................. 3
2.3 Installation of the CPF Configuration File .................................................... 6
3 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................6

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR 25.0 Chapter 7 / III

12-2006 Type 5156 Agfa Company Confidential
1 Introduction
Digitizer Software C25_2007 can be installed on the following digitizers:

• CR 25.0
• CR 35-X
Digitizers with software version C25_2007 are recommended to be used in

combination with the following processing stations:
• CR QS 3.5.372 SU1 or higher (for GenRad applications)

• CR QS 3.5.372M or higher (for Mammography applications)
• NX 1.0.3203 or higher (for GenRad applications)
1.2 Order Number
Digitizer Software C25_2007 is available under CM+ 9 5156 1080 3.
The digitizer software can also be downloaded from MedNet, GSO Library:
Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/CR 25.0/Freeware/
CR 25.0 - Software - Device Software C25_2007
When Digitizer Software C25_2007 is ordered, the scope of delivery consists

of following parts:
• 1 x C25_2007 software kit (consisting of 3 floppy disks)

• 1 x Portex Installer disk (consisting of 2 floppy disks)
• 1 x language disk (holds the language files)
• 1 x empty floppy disk for backup
• 1 Installation Instructions for C25_2007
(this document – DD+DIS319.06E))


1.4 Prerequisites
REQUIRED TOOLS
• 1 empty floppy for the backup
(only needed when the Digitizer Software is downloaded from MedNet)
• 6 floppies to store the software
(only needed when the Digitizer Software is downloaded from MedNet)
• serial cable to connect your service PC to the digitizer
(serial cable commercially available)
• test images, in case they are not available on the digitizer:
CM+9 5145 1055 0
1.5 Release Information for C25_2007
For the release information of the digitizer software refer to

chapter 3.8 “Software Releases and Patches” of the CR 25.0
Service Manual (DD+DIS335.06E).


2 Installation Procedure for C25_2007
NOTE:
Together with digitizer software C25_2007, a new Portex version 2006.02
has been released. This Portex version is required if Oberon 3 board is
installed on the digitizer.
2.1 Upgrading from an older Software Version
(1) Make a backup of the machine specific data.
(2) Perform installation according to installation instructions on a virgin

hard disk (see 2.2).
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Open side panel and insert service key.
(3) Switch digitizer on again.
(4) Disconnect the digitizer from the network

(since a default IP-Address & hostname is configured).
(5) Take the floppy Portex Installer 1/2 (includes Hard disk formatter)
and insert it into the disk drive of the digitizer.

(7) Press the <Reset> button on CPU board or turn power of the
digitizer off/on.
(8) Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk on your terminal with y.


(10) Insert the floppy Portex Installer 2/2 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
digitizer off/on.
IMPORTANT:
Do not insert any other floppy!
(14) Press the <Reset> button on CPU-Board or turn power of the

digitizer off/on.
(15) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal.
(16) Insert the first floppy of the CR 25.0 Application (labeled C252007_1_3)
digitizer off/on.
(18) Wait until you get the final message on the terminal or wait until
control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(19) Insert the second floppy of the CR 25.0 Application

(labeled C252007_2_3) into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(20) Press the <Reset> button on CPU board or turn power of the digitizer
off/on.
(22) Insert the third floppy of the CR 25.0 Application (labeled C252007_3_3)
digitizer off/on.


(26) Press the <Reset> button on CPU board or turn power of the digitizer
off/on and wait approx. 2 minutes (system extracts software release).
(27) When asked to, press the <Reset> button on CPU board again or turn
power of digitizer off/on and wait until the system is up.
(28) Press ∨ to confirm the installation.
(30) Restore device-specific data from your backup.
NOTE:
Without restoring the device specific parameters, an operation of
the digitizer is impossible!
Restore the device-specific parameters by using the backup floppy.
For the procedure follow the guidelines of the Service Menu Topic
Install from floppy, Machine specific data on the digitizer display.
(31) Restore the test images.
Result: Installation of C25_2007 Digitizer Software is complete.


2.3 Installation of the CPF Configuration File
(1) Make sure the digitizer is disconnected from the network (!).
NOTE:
Never connect the digitizer to the network before configuring it with
a valid CPF file
(2) Generate the CPF file with the QS, the VIPS or the CCM.
(3) Parse the CPF file using the guidelines of the Service Menu Topic Install
from floppy, CPF file follow the instructions displayed on the user
interface.
(6) Refresh your backup by following the guidelines of Service Menu Topic
Save on floppy, Machine specific data.
3 Troubleshooting
Following problem might occur during the installation of the digitizer software.
Please stick to the described solution to overcome this problem.
Symptom When you have inserted a floppy disk, the following error message
comes up:
“startup.com could not be found”
figure 1
Defect The floppy disk can not be read.
Solution Remove the floppy and insert it again. Then restart the digitizer.


DD+DIS319.06E
Copyright  2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Published by
D - 81539 München
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV


Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
CR 25.0
Type 5156/100

This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their
chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and
software modifications.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.14:
1.15 12-2007 • Added Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Details section 1, page 4.
• Added Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
• Added Modification of Side Panel left
• Added Modification of cPCI-Rack
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_08_modifications_e_template_v03
DD+DIS336.05E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


TABLE OF CONTENT
The following modifications of CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 are listed in chronological order,
the latest modification on top of the list.
timeline Modification Referenced Documents

2007
August 1. Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump Enclosure: DD+DIS151.07E,
SB No. 15: DD+DIS275.07E
June 2. Introduction of Oberon 3 Board Enclosure: DD+DIS034.07E
April 3. Modification of Side Panel left n.a.
February 4. Modification of cPCI-Rack n.a.
2006
October 5. Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board n.a.
August 6. SB No. 13: DD+DIS320.06E,
Chapter 7 of the service
Introduction of Digitizer Software C25_2007
manual: DD+DIS319.06E
2005
Nov. 7. Modification of the Cassette Opener SB No. 10: DD+DIS013.06E
Nov. 8. Modification of the Oberon Board SB No. 9: DD+DIS423.05E
Sept. 9. Introduction of Digitizer Software C25_1020 FSB No. 7: DD+DIS306.05E,
Chapter 7 in the service
July 10. Modification of the Optic Module n.a.
February 11. Introduction of Digitizer Software C25_1008 FSB No. 4: DD+DIS030.05E,
2004
Nov. 12. Introduction of Digitizer Software C25_1006 FSB No. 2: DD+DIS383.04E,
Nov. 13. Modification of the Shielding Plate FSB No. 1: DD+DIS372.04E


1 Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Reason A modified vacuum pump has been introduced for the use of the
digitizer on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level.
Products(s)/ The High Altitude Vacuum Pump is not part of series production and
Serial only available as upgrade kit for new installations or already installed
Numbers(s) digitizers as well as spare part for the replacement of modified
vacuum pumps, which are defective.
Part • Upgrade Kit “High Altitude Vacuum Pump for CR 25.0/CR 35-X”
Number(s) ABC Code: EZKDB
• Spare part “High Altitude Vacuum Pump”
CM+9 5158 6130 0
Referenced • Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: High Altitude Vacuum
Document(s) Pump for Use on Sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above Sea
Level, DD+DIS151.07E
• Service Bulletin No. 15, DD+DIS275.07E
2 Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
Reason In respect to the previous Oberon Board, the Oberon 3 Board is

RoHS compliant (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment).No functional
changes have been made.
Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher is required when using the
Oberon 3 board. The required Digitizer Software is in scope of the
spare part.
This spare part can be used in RoHS compliant and non-RoHS
compliant Digitizers.
Oberon 3 Board requires Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher.
Products(s)/ As no CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 digitizers are produced, this
Serial modification is only available as spare part.
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “Oberon 3 Board”, CM+9 5146 1501 0
Number(s)
Referenced • Enclosure - Installation Instructions of the Oberon 3 Board,
Document(s) DD+DIS034.07E


3 Modification of Side Panel left
Reason The side panel left has been modified to ensure more free space
between photomultiplier and side panel left. This improvement has
been introduced to avoid contact between photomultiplier and side
panel left.
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “Side wall, lhs”, CM+9 5155 1270 4
Number(s)
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)
4 Modification of cPCI-Rack
Reason The power supply unit has been modified to enable the use of hard
disks with higher voltage input.
The modified power supply unit is RoHS compliant.
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “cPCI-Rack complete, CM+9 5156 1400 1
Number(s)
• Spare part “cPCI-Rack assembled”, CM+9 5156 1405 4
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)


5 Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board
Reason The fixation of the 5-fold stepper motor board has been changed to
prevent bending of the board.
Products(s)/ SN > 4430

Serial
Numbers(s)
Part The new fixation and the board are included when ordering:
Number(s) spare part “cassette unit”: CM+9 5156 5000 0
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)
6 Introduction of Digitizer Software C25_2007
Reason With the software, the following new features are introduced:
• EUREF compliance: This new feature has been introduced
for the successor digitizer CR 35-X only.
The CR 25.0 digitizer is not compliant with the EUREF
standard.
• “Fast Preview” functionality: With this new functionality,
the image can be viewed on the processing station while
being scanned by the digitizer. This functionality has already
been available in the digitizers ADC Solo, ADC Compact+,
CR 75.0 and CR 85-X.
• New Portex version 2006.02: This Portex version is required
in combination with Oberon 3 board. This new Oberon 3
board will be introduced soon in order to be RoHS compliant.
Products(s)/ SN = 4279, SN > 4281; CW 34/2006
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part Download from MedNet, GSO Library:
Number(s) Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/CR 25.0/Freeware/
CR 25.0 - Software - Device Software c25_2007
Spare part: “software C25_2007”: CM+9 5156 1080 3
Referenced For more information on the issue refer to SB No. 13
Document(s) (DD+DIS320.06E).
For the installation instructions of the software refer to chapter 7 of
the service manual (DD+DIS319.06E).


7 Modification of the Cassette Opener
Reason Small cassettes are not returned to the I/O slot of the digitizer. The
cassette falls down into the transport unit (HQ_0502090002). This
problem does not occur when using the modified cassette opener.
Products(s)/ SN > 3144, CW 47/2005
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “cassette opener”: CM+9 5156 9050 0
Number(s)
8 Modification of the Oberon Board
Reason Sporadically, the digitizer stops operation without prompting an

error message (HQ_0502110002). This problem could be solved by
improving the durability of the cooling components on the Oberon
board.
Products(s)/ SN > 3061
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “Oberon board”: CM+9 5146 1500 6
Number(s)
Document(s) (DD+DIS423.05E)


Reason Extremities application is integrated. Optimizations and bug fixes

are included.
Products(s)/ SN ≥ 2838, CW 37/2005
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part Software C25_1020: CM+9 5156 1080 2
Number(s)
Download from MedNet, GSO Library:
Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/CR 25.0/Freeware/ CR 25.0
- Software - Device Software C25_1020
Referenced For the release information refer to FSB No. 7 (DD+DIS306.05E).
Document(s)
For the installation instructions of the software refer to chapter 7 in
10 Modification of the Optic Module
Reason Optic module uses only one laser diode.

Products/ SN ≥ 2579 CW 27/2005
Serial
Numbers
Part Number • Spare part “optic module”: CM+9 5156 2700 1
Reference n.a.
Documents


Reason With the software, the following bugs have been solved:
• FLFS (Full Leg / Full Spine) application could not be turned
on/off
• Emergency/Direct-ID mode could not be toggled using the
speed-class key
Products(s)/ SN ≥ 1665, CW 05/2005
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part: “software C25_1008”: CM+9 5156 1080 1
Number(s)
Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/CR 25.0/Freeware/ CR
25.0 - Software - Device Software C25_1008
Document(s)
Reason With the software, the following bug has been solved:
• Erasure was done with wrong depth; cassettes were not
accepted in Emergency or Direct ID status.
Products(s)/ SN ≥ 1306, CW 46/2004
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part Spare part “software C25_1006”: CM+9 5156 1080 0
Number(s)
Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/CR 25.0/Freeware/ CR 25.0
- Software - Device Software C25_1006
Document(s)


13 Modification of the Shielding Plate
Reason The shielding plate avoids IP jams which were elicited by wrong
signals due to erasure light emission.
Products(s)/ SN ≥ 1306, CW 46/2004
Serial
Numbers(s)
Part • Spare part “shielding plate”: CM+9 5156 2452 0
Number(s)
Referenced For more information on the issue refer to FSB No. 1


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
*1YY4O61*
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100
1 Piece YY4O6 MA1
internal update # 2
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS240.05E

Maintenance DD+DIS240.05E
Caution:
This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective

safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must

only be performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

qualified electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE

Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without
explicit consent of the manufacturer!
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical progress.

Chapter 9 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 7
DD+DIS240.05E Maintenance
Chapter 9
List of Contents
1 General Safety Instructions...................................... 1
2 General Information .................................................. 2

2.1 Maintenance Frequency.......................................................... 2
2.2 Required Time.......................................................................... 2
2.3 Required Tools ........................................................................ 3
2.4 Required Cleaning Material .................................................... 3
2.5 Required Spare Parts .............................................................. 3
3 Maintenance Step by Step........................................ 4

3.1 Diagnostics .............................................................................. 4
3.1.1 Questioning of the Customer .............................................................. 4
3.1.2 Infocounter Analysis............................................................................ 4
3.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter ......................................................... 5
3.1.4 Clear Infocounter................................................................................. 6
3.1.5 Visual Check ....................................................................................... 6
3.2 Safety Switches .......................................................................6
3.3 Inside ........................................................................................7
3.4 Cassette Unit............................................................................ 7
3.5 cPCI Rack ................................................................................. 8
3.6 Scan Unit ..................................................................................9
3.7 Transport Unit........................................................................ 10
3.8 Erasure Unit ........................................................................... 11
3.9 Cassettes ............................................................................... 12
3.10 Image Plates........................................................................... 13
4 Checking the Image Quality ................................... 13

4.1 Test Cycles............................................................................. 13
4.2 Exposure of a Flatfield .......................................................... 13
4.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield ........................................................ 16
5 Completion of Maintenance ................................... 17

Maintenance Checklist

1 General Safety Instructions

the CR 25.0.
or injuries.
immediately.
• Check that the voltage setting of the machine matches the power supply
voltage before connecting the machine to the mains.

2 General Information
These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential.
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed
below (minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
• The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable

order to make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is
identical with these maintenance instructions.
• If there is a detailed description for a certain maintenance point in the
service documentation, this will be noted in the column "details".
• During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions,
see service documentation chapter 1 / 1.
• Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as
additional maintenance points!
Only for Systems with DRA Contract:

In systems with DRA Contract the infocounters are checked and evaluated in
regular intervals by the GSC. If there is an indication of an upcoming defect,
this is noted in the DRA Report and sent to the respective NSO with
instructions for measures possibly required on the machine.
Therefore we recommend to contact your NSO about this subject before
maintenance, in order to perform these recommended measures in addition
to the "must" maintenance points.
2.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 12.000 cycles
or
• once a year
2.2 Required Time
approximately 2 h

2.3 Required Tools
Order number Description

CM+9 5155 1015 2 Cu Filter (for exposure of test images)
CM+9 5145 3055 0 CD ROM with test images
Commercially available service PC
Commercially available flashlight
2.4 Required Cleaning Material
In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are

required:
CM+9 9999 0895 0 vacuum cleaner
CM+9 9999 0896 0 dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
ABC-Code: EFOJH ADC cleaner
commercially available dust brush
commercially available lint-free cloth
commercially available soft dust brush
2.5 Required Spare Parts
The following assortment represents a complete copy of the

Maintenance-assortment (CM+0 5156 0100 733)
according to the R I M L -assortment categorization in the spare parts list:
CM+9 0450 6553 0 10 x erasure lamp, 100 W, 12 V
CM+9 5145 9100 0 1 x roller (for cassette unit)

3 Maintenance Step by Step

3.1 Diagnostics
3.1.1 Questioning of the Customer

• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last
maintenance.
3.1.2 Infocounter Analysis
• Service PC, required to analyze the infocounter
(1) Insert an empty floppy in the floppy

drive of the cPCI rack.
MG3000
See Figure 1. Infocounter
(2) In the service menu select

<3 Save on floppy>
< 1 Infocounter>
(3) When copying is finished remove
the floppy from the floppy drive
and insert it in the Service PC.
5155_reg09_002.cdr
Figure 1
(4) Unzip the file "5156_xxxx_icn.zip"
(xxxx stands for the serial number).
(5) Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad).
(6) Open the file "\D_\infocounter\0\infocounter.txt".
(7) Evaluate the infocounter file.

3.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter
Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
1.1 Device Info: Serial Compare device serial number to chapter 8
number and “Manufacturing Standard Modifications” and
Installation date chapter 10 “Field Service Bulletins” to determine
whether the device is modified or requires a
modification.
1.4 Software Info It is recommended to have the latest software
installed. Before you upgrade to a new software,
make sure that your hardware is up to date.
2.2 Throughput For throughput most important are the cycles per
day. They usually count between 30 and 100.
3.3 Hardware By comparing the status of the device with the
Modification History available “Field Modifications”, chapter 7, the
exact hardware status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list.
4.6 Laser power Check that laser power is constant: no more than
1 mW difference in between two entries. If the
value is higher, run system check.
4.7 Polygon Jitter If amplitude exceeded 300 milli-pixel, check
Monitoring accurately the image quality on the workstation.
Do not exchange optic modules without having
contacted the support center.
The entries are only indications and can

only be interpreted as one symptom
which is conducted to the optic module.
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%) have to be investigated:
They usually lead to less throughput of the
device. Compare it with frequent error codes.
5.7 Error History Check the errors occurred since last
maintenance, how often they appeared as well
as the CBF (cycles between failures) of these
errors. This gives an overview of the current
status of the machine.
Compare frequently occurring errors to the error
hit list, chapter 3.3, and take actions.

Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
5.8 Error List Relatives Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
5.9 Error List Total “Troubleshooting”.
3.1.4 Clear Infocounter
(1) Clear the infocounter to refresh relative counters.
3.1.5 Visual Check
• flashlight
(1) Check overall condition of the machine – outside and inside – for obvious
changes or damage.
3.2 Safety Switches
(1) Check both interlock switches

(A) and (B), Figure 2.
The machine starts up only, if both

interlocks are pressed. B
The power supply is interrupted,

when the front door (interlock A) is
opened. 5155_reg09_003.cdr
Figure 2

3.3 Inside
• vacuum cleaner
• lint free cloth
(1) Vacuum the inside of the digitizer and wipe it.
3.4 Cassette Unit
• screw driver
• dust brush
• roller
(CM+9 5145 9100 0)
• toothed belt
(CM+9 5145 5195 1)
Opener (1) Remove panel on right hand

Mechanism side of the digitizer.
(2) Clean the opener mechanism
with a soft dust brush.
5155_reg09_004.cdr
Figure 3

(3) Check roller (A) for visible

wear and replace if necessary
(see Figure 4).
(4) To replace the roller, remove
the retaining ring (B) and pull
the roller off its shaft.
In case of recorded cassette

feeding problems replace the
roller anyway and in any case
replace it once a year.
B
A
5155_reg09_005.cdr
Figure 4
Belt (5) Exchange the transport belt once a year.
3.5 cPCI Rack
• vacuum cleaner
cPCI Fan (1) Check the fan function of the cPCI rack fan by hand.
There is no air filter to be replaced.
General (2) Remove visible dust and dirt deposits using a vacuum cleaner.

3.6 Scan Unit
• soft cloth
• ADC cleaner
(if not available, use water)
• Allen key 3 mm
Scan (1) Remove the transport unit.

Rollers (see chapter 3.5).
(2) Clean all scan rollers (use a
soft cloth and ADC cleaner).
The scan rollers have to be

cleaned in place and must not be
removed. To move the scan rollers
just turn the drive of the slow scan
motor manually (C), see Figure 5.
Discharge (3) Check the discharge brush (A)

Brush for visible wear and heavy dirt.
Clean them by hand or replace
(B), if necessary.
5155_reg09_006.cdr
Figure 5

3.7 Transport Unit
• soft cloth
• ADC cleaner (if not available, use water)
• suction cups (CM+9 5145 6550 2)
Filter (1) Pull the hoses off the filter.

(2) Unscrew the filter (A).
(3) Shake the micro-filter (B) and
blow it clean.
(4) Check the O-ring for cracks
B
and, if necessary, remove the
complete filter with its housing A
(CM+9 0362 6094 0).
5155_reg09_012.cdr
Figure 6
(5) Check the suction cups

Suction
position.
Cups
(6) Clean the suction cups (C) with
ADC cleaner. A
(7) In case of vacuum problems,
check the suction cups by
bending up the edges (check
for tears) and replace if
necessary.
5155_reg09_007.cdr
Figure 7

3.8 Erasure Unit
• soft cloth
• ADC cleaner (if not available, use water)
• 10 x 100 W lamps (CM+9 0450 6553 0)
lamps (1) Open the front door. B

(2) Pull the erasure unit out and
remove it.
(3) Remove pane (A).
(4) Pull all lamps carefully out of
their sockets (B).
A
(5) Check all parts of the erasure
unit for damage.
5155_reg09_008.cdr
Figure 8
(6) Dust the following parts of the erasure unit
• reflector
• input and output opening of the air stream (protection grid)
• KG2 filter (A).
• front pane (B) (see Figure 9).
In case of persistent dirt, use ADC cleaner for cleaning all surfaces except
the inner side of the large glass plate. This side must not be cleaned with
anything wet since a gelatin layer is attached to it.

(7) Check the KG2 filter (A) for

damage and replace if
necessary. A
(8) Insert the new lamps
carefully.
5155_reg09_009.cdr
Figure 9
Do not touch the glass bulbs with your bare fingers. Use a soft cloth to insert
the lamps.
Fan (9) Check fan of erasure unit for dust and clean if necessary.
(10) Re-insert the erasure unit.
3.9 Cassettes
• aluminum label (CM+9 8300 1131 0)
Visual Check (1) Check the most frequently

used cassettes and image
plates for damage. If
damage is noticed, check
further cassettes. ALU LABEL
(2) Check the following items of

the cassette:
- Outside condition
- Hinges 5156_reg09_010.cdr
- Locking
Figure 10
- Opening leaf springs
- Aluminum label
(3) Attach missing aluminum
label.
The digitizer needs the aluminum label to recognize ADC cassettes.

3.10 Image Plates
Visual Check (1) Check if there are scratches on the surface.

(2) Check if edges are loose as an indication for mechanical problems at IP
transport.
4 Checking the Image Quality
Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS Processing Station / ADC QS

Server Station for artifacts or other image quality problems.
4.1 Test Cycles
(1) Carry out four test cycles with each format of the cassettes.
4.2 Exposure of a Flatfield
Repeat the following procedure for all formats on site!
• Flatfield
(1) Print the flatfield sample provided by the digitizer:

• Start the service program.
• Select from the service menu
<7 Checks>
<2 Send image>
<2 Flatfield Calibration pattern>
<3 Flatfield Banding pattern>
Print the flatfields "Calibration" and "Banding" via the processing

station (Window Setting of 0.6, without changing the Level Setting).

(2) Expose a new image plate:

Rotating
• Place the cassette in Anode X-ray tube
length direction to the
X-ray tube
(see Figure 11).
• Set the following
exposure parameters:
− dose 10 μGy
(result of setting:
12 mAs, 75 kVp,
1.3 m distance) 5156_reg09_011.cdr
− 1.5 mm Cu filter with Figure 11
small focus
• Turn cassette by 180°.
• Expose plate a second
time by using the same
parameters.
Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose!

Notice, that all exposure parameters are approximate values.
(3) Identify the cassette on the ID Station (Figure 12):

• In the <Patient name> field, type a name and a cassette format,
e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24.
• In the <First name> field, type the serial number of the digitizer,
e.g. SN1356.
• In the <Birth date> field, type the current date,
e.g. 02012001 (use date format DDMMYYYY for day/month/year).
• In the <Study Group> list, click <SERVICE>.
• In the <Study Type> list, click <system diagnosis>.
• In the <Substudy> list, click <Flatfield>.
• Confirm the Exposure class <200>.
Make sure that the outlined areas are filled in as shown in the example.

(4) Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with a
Window Setting of 0.6 without changing the Level Setting.
5155_reg09_013.jpg
Figure 12

4.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield
(1) Inspect the developed image for homogeneity:

Compare the prints of the flatfield sample with your exposed flatfield at a
light box.
• If there are no lines visible or the effects are less than on the
example, the image quality is all right.
• If there are unacceptable effects, compare with the following
sketches.
Calibration lines
Blurred dark lines in slow scan
direction on the flatfield
(see Figure 13).
• Expose another flatfield and
compare it again with the
sample.
If there are still unacceptable
effects, you have to redo shading
calibration as described in chapter
3.6. Figure 13
Expose another flatfield and
compare it again with the sample.
If there are still unacceptable effects, please contact the Support

Center.
Banding
Fine sharp white or gray lines in fast
scan direction on the flatfield
(see Figure 14).
• Check diagnostic images.
Figure 14

Center.

Dust
Fine sharp lines in slow scan
direction on the flatfield
(see Figure 15).
• Check if scanner is dusty. If
yes, use the scan brush to
remove it. Expose another flat
field and compare it again with
the sample.
Figure 15

Center.
5 Completion of Maintenance
(1) Confirm the maintenance by signing the checklist.
(2) Make a backup of the system on floppy.
(3) Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and
which repairs need to be done in next future.

Copyright © 2005-08-03 DD+DIS240.05E Agfa-Gevaert AG
All rights reserved
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Technical modifications reserved
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100
Work Instructions for order no. SN Cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
• Once a year or every 12.000 cycles
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions,

see chapter 9 of your Service Documentation.
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Diagnostics • Ask customer about problems
• Read out the info counters, analyse them and clear
them afterwards
• Check visually the overall condition
Safety Switches • Check function of both safety switches

Inside • Vacuum the inside and wipe it
Cassette Unit • Clean opener mechanism
• Check roller for visible wear and exchange if necessary
• Exchange belt once a year
cPCI Rack • Check function of the cPCI rack fan manually

• Remove dust and dirt
Scan Unit • Clean scan-rollers with ADC Cleaner

(do not remove!)
• Check discharge brush and clean or replace it if
necessary
Transport Units • Clean micro filter
• Check suction cups position, clean them with ADC
Cleaner and exchange suction cups if necessary

Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS240.05E
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Erasure Unit • Remove dust from reflector, input and output opening of
air stream, KG2 filter, outer front panel
• Check the KG2 filter
• Exchange lamps every maintenance
• Clean fan, if necessary
Cassettes • Check the following items of the cassette:
outside condition, hinges, locking, opening leaf springs,
aluminum label
• Attach missing aluminum labels
Image Plates • Check if there are scratches on the surface

• Check if edges are loose
Checking the Image Quality Done

General • Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS / ADC QS
• Carry out test cycles, four with each format
• Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer
• Expose a flatfield
• Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions
Completion of the maintenance Done

General • Confirm the maintenance
• Make a backup of the system on floppy
• Inform the customer about maintenance and which
repairs are necessary

Maintenance Checklist / Page 2 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 7
DD+DIS240.05E Maintenance Checklist
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Edition 1, Revision 7 CR 25.0 Maintenance Checklist / Page 3
Imaging Services Service Bulletins
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
CR 25.0 Æ Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS071.04E Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank


08-2004 Type 5156 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Installation Planning
Order-No.: DD+DIS232.05E CR 25.0

*1YY2PZ1*
1 Piece YY2PZ MA1
Type 5156 / 100
internal update #: 1
The Installation Planning Instructions are separately available. Order No: DD+DIS232.05E

1 2 3
Installation Planning DD+DIS232.05E
Caution:
This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective

safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must

only be performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

qualified electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a

qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE

Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without
explicit consens of the manufacturer!
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light

of technical progress.

Chapter 11 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 9
1 2 3
DD+DIS232.05E Installation Planning
Chapter 11
List of Contents
1 Safety ........................................................................... 1
1.1 Intended use .............................................................................. 1
1.2 General Safety Instructions ...................................................... 2
1.3 Safety Instructions for Laser Products.................................... 5
1.4 Safety Regulations .................................................................... 6
2 Scope of Delivery ........................................................ 7
3 Required Tools for Installation .................................. 7
4 System Overview ........................................................ 8
5 Machine Dimensions and Transport Path ................ 9

5.1 Required free Space .................................................................. 9
5.1.1 CR 25.0 standalone.............................................................................. 9
5.1.2 CR 25.0 with CRUS............................................................................. 10
5.2 Machine Dimensions ............................................................... 11
5.3 Transport Path ......................................................................... 12
6 Climatic and ambient Conditions ............................ 12
7 Electrical Connections ............................................. 14

7.1 External Fuse Protection ........................................................ 14
7.2 Connection Cables .................................................................. 14
7.3 Power Connection ................................................................... 15
8 Specifications............................................................ 16
8.1 Type Overview ......................................................................... 16
8.2 Electrical Data.......................................................................... 16

1 2 3
8.3 Packing Dimensions ............................................................... 16

8.3.1 Package ...............................................................................................16
8.3.2 Weights ................................................................................................16
8.3.3 Transport Conditions............................................................................16
9 Installation Planning Checklist ................................ 17

9.1 Checklist................................................................................... 18
10 Form to fill in the Network Parameters ................... 19

1 2 3
This document describes the Installation Planning of the CR 25.0 Digitizer,

Type 5156 / 100.
For the Installation Planning of other ADC devices, refer to the respective
Installation Planning documents (see MedNet).
1 Safety
The device must only be operated according to its specifications and its
intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or
intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries
or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA positively will not
assume any liability in these cases.
The device must only be installed and put into operation under the specified
conditions.
1.1 Intended use
The CR 25.0 must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing
an erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-
ray cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for
the cassettes and a workstation where the resulting digital image information
is further processed and routed.
It is intended that the CR 25.0 is only operated in a radiological environment
by qualified staff.

1 2 3
1.2 General Safety Instructions

the CR 25.0.
or injuries.
immediately.
• Check that the mains voltage is within the specified range of the self
adapting power supply of the machine.

1 2 3
Markings and labels

Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and
outside of the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and
their meaning is given below.
Safety warning, indicating that the CR 25.0 manuals must be consulted

before making any connections to other equipment. The use of accessory
equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
Digitizer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system.
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity

• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has
been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 601-1 and
IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems
standard IEC 601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system
configurator and is responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required contact your local service organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the erasure unit.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the CR 25.0 complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the CR 25.0 and the potential equalization

busbar of the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug
should never be unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.

1 2 3
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might
exhibit minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade
the quality of communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground):
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the
mains. Do not remove this connection, because this will have a negative
influence on the leakage current.
Power on
Power off:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order
to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is

connected to a 240 V / 60 Hz source instead of a 120 V / 60 Hz source.
You can hurt your fingers if they are caught between the ADC Cassette and
the edge of the input slot. At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot.
As soon as the CR 25.0 takes in the cassette, release it.
System configuration responsibility

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be
certified according to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC 950 for data
processing equipment and IEC 601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all
configurations shall comply with the valid version of the system standard IEC
601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible
that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of the
system standard IEC 601-1-1. If in doubt, consult your local service
organization.

1 2 3
1.3 Safety Instructions for Laser Products
The CR 25.0 is a Class 1 Laser Product. It uses a 2x50 mW laser diode,

classification class 3b.
Under normal operating conditions - when both the front door and the right side
panel are closed - there can be no laser radiation outside the CR 25.0. It is
nonetheless imperative that the local radiation safety regulations regarding
the protection of staff against scattered radiation are complied with, if the CR
25.0 is located in the immediate vicinity of an X-ray room.
Open the front door or the right side panel to solve cassette or image plate
jams the power supply of all critical components is switched off automatically
as a precaution.
Do not open the unit and put in the service key in the interlocks , if any
parts of the laser unit are uncovered.
WARNING User interventions other than those described in this manual can be

1 2 3
1.4 Safety Regulations
Certificates
The CR 25.0 complies with:
• the general safety regulations :
EN 60601-1:1990 / A1:1993, A2:1995, A13:1996
EN 60601-1-2:2001
IEC 601-1:1988 / A1:1991, A2:1995,
IEC 601-1-1 / EN 60601-1-1,
UL 60601-1:2003
CAN / CSA C22.2 No.601.1-M90
• the laser safety regulations :
EN 60825-1:1994 / A1:2002, A2:2001
DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11,
ANSI Z 136-1980.
• EN ISO 14971:2000
EN 1041:1998
EN 980:1996/A1
The Digitizer is in compliance with EG regulation 93/42/EEC Directive

(Medical Device)
Radio Interference Suppression

• It is hereby certified that the Digitizer has interference suppression
according to EN 55011 Class B as well as FCC Rules CR47 Part 15 Class
B (North-America).
Short range devices

• EN 300 330-2 V1.1.1
EN 301 489-03 V1.2.1
Warning
For USA only:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
In case of the equipment will cause harmful interference to other
devices see user manual for help.

1 2 3
2 Scope of Delivery
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 Installation Instructions
1 Installation Report
1 User Manual
1 Reference Manual
1 Certificates
2 Mains Cable (1 x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
8 floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy,
1 x Backup floppy, 1 x Language floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)
3 Required Tools for Installation
Pieces Description Order No.

1 Cu filter CM+9 5155 1015 2
1 CD-ROM with test images CM+9 5145 3055 0

1 2 3
4 System Overview
on
ly
Figure 1
The above example shows the Digitizer connected to a WIN NT based ADC
Quality System (ADC QS).

1 2 3
5 Machine Dimensions and Transport Path

5.1 Required free Space
5.1.1 CR 25.0 standalone
150 (59.05")
5(1.97")
45 (17.72")
5 (1.97")
Digitizer
75 (29.53")
200 (78.74")
120 (47.24")
5155_reg11_002.CDR
Figure 2
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and
maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
All dimensions in cm (inch).
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and

Ethernet connection.

1 2 3
5.1.2 CR 25.0 with CRUS
Figure 3
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and
maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and

Ethernet connection.

1 2 3
5.2 Machine Dimensions
Figure 4

1 2 3
5.3 Transport Path
It must be possible to transport the Minimum doorwidth 47 cm (18.50")

digitizer through all hallways and doors
up to the installation site.
The machine dimensions are 134 cm x 45 cm x 75 cm
(HxWxD)
52.76" x 17.72" x 29.53"
(HxWxD)
Packed on a pallet 80 cm x 100 cm (31.5" x 39.37")
Minimum space to remove the digitizer 200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
off the pallet
Once the machine is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on

four mounted rollers.
6 Climatic and ambient Conditions
All specifications in this chapter apply on unpacked digitizer.
Temperature and Humidity

Ambient temperature 15°C min. / 59°F min.
30°C max. / 86°F max.
20°C ideal / 68°F ideal
Rate of change of temperature 0.5°C per min. / 0.9°F per min.
Relative Humidity 15 % min.
(at 25°C / 77°F ambient 80 % max.
temperature) 40 - 50 % ideal
Light Tightness
Tightness SALMIN still met at 2500 lux ambient light
The digitizer must not be operated in direct sunlight exposure.

1 2 3
Throughput (scan mode fast)

Throughput 71 (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)
(Image plates per hour) 48 (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)
Cassette Return Time

Time between entry of cassette < 51 s (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)
and return of erased cassette < 75 s (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)
(seconds)
Floor Conditions
Horizontal Alignment Digitizer works without leveling,
horizontal alignment is not required.
Nevertheless, the digitizer should be run
preferably in a horizontal position.
Take care that the digitizer can not tilt at
the installation site.
Magnetic Fields
Maximal permissible magnetic according to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5
field in the room
Emissions
Noise level during scanning max. 65 dB (A)
stand-by mode / idle max. 45 dB (A)

1 2 3
7 Electrical Connections
7.1 External Fuse Protection
Fuse Rated voltage (single phase)

maximal line fuse 16 A 240 V, + 10 %
maximal line fuse 16 A 230 V, + 10 %
maximal line fuse 15 A 120 V, + 10 % (e.g. USA)
maximal line fuse 15 A 100 V, + 10 % (e.g. Japan)
7.2 Connection Cables
Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:

• USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
• Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V/16 A
One network cable is included as standard delivery

• UTP network cable, 5 m long, (2 x RJ45 connection)

1 2 3
7.3 Power Connection
Single phase connection, operable on 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
The digitizer has a voltage selector at its rear side . Voltage adaptation has
to be checked prior to first operation.
If the voltage adaptation is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the
switch (1, Figure 5) to correct position.
1 Voltage selector
Voltage can be
adapted to 100 / 120 /
230 - 240 V. The
default setting is
230 - 240 V
2 Mains connection
Put in the correct
mains cable
(delivered in the
enclosure box)
1
2 g11
_0 04.c
dr
5_re
515
Figure 5
If the CR 25.0 shall operate at 240 V, 60 Hz, use a phase to phase centre
tap wall outlet. Otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.

1 2 3
8 Specifications
8.1 Type Overview
Digitizer / Type
CR 25.0 5156 / 100
8.2 Electrical Data
Rated Voltage [~V] 100 V 15 A

120 V 12 A
230 - 240 V 7A
Frequency [Hz] 50 / 60
Power consumption [W] Standby approx. 400 W
Maximum approx. 1400 W
Leakage current ≤ 3,5 mA
8.3 Packing Dimensions
8.3.1 Package
Packed on a pallet the size is:
Height 160 cm (63")
Width 80 cm (31.5")
Depth 100 cm (39.4")
8.3.2 Weights
Digitizer without package approx. 215 kg

Digitizer with package approx. 275 kg
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the
digitizer.
8.3.3 Transport Conditions
Temperature -25°C / -13°F for 72 hrs.

+55°C / 131°F for 96 hrs.
Relative Humidity 5 % to 95 %

1 2 3
9 Installation Planning Checklist

In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the
machine start-up, the following points of the checklist below should be carried
out prior to the installation.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of
this checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of
the list.
We ask you to give this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Customer: ........................................................................................
.................................
Department: ........................................................................................
.................................
System ........................................................................................
components: .................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
Desired .......................... Signed: .............................................

installation date: .......................... Signature
.......
Remarks:

1 2 3
9.1 Checklist
Subject Prepared: OK NOK

Required external Fixed connection via an all-pole
connections main switch or connection via plug
and socket approx. 30 cm from the
floor.
Type 5156 / 100:
Cables
USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A
Mains connection Appointment with the house
electrician or authorized electrician
for the mains connection has been
made?
Network connection Ethernet connection (Twisted pair)
prepared?
Direct Remote Remote Access must be
Access guaranteed!
Transport path Transport to the installation site,
unpacking and taking the machine
off the pallet must be done by the
carrier.
Transport path:
Minimum doorwidth 47 cm
(18.50")
Way:
.......................................................
...................................................
Free space for taking the machine
off the pallet defined?
200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
Place:
.......................................................
..................................................

1 2 3
10 Form to fill in the Network Parameters
Digitizer Example 1st Digitizer 2nd Digitizer Remarks

hostname ADCS1
ip_addr. 192.9.200.199
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADCS1
Station Name * ADCS1
ADC QS 1st Server 2nd Server

Example Remarks
Server Station Station Station
hostname ADC_QS
ip_addr. 192.9.200.202
subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADC_QS
AE_title ID-
Viewer
Station Name * ADC_QS
ID - Viewer Example 1st ID-Viewer 2nd ID-Viewer Remarks

hostname ID207
ip_addr. 192.9.200.207
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID207
Station Name * ID207
ADC QS Server 192.9.200.202
to connect to or ADC_QS
= main components

1 2 3
ADC QS Client Example 1st Client 2nd Client Remarks

Station Station Station
hostname QC206
ip_addr. 192.9.200.206
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID-Viewer
ADC QS Server to 192.9.200.202
connect to or ADC_QS
Hard Copy Example 1st HCP 2nd HCP Remarks

Printer
hostname MG1
ip_addr. 192.9.200.201
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ADC_LR1
Station Name * ADC_LR1
RIS-System Remarks
hostname
ip_addr.
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
Station Name *
*) Friendly name (Station name) appears in the USER interface
Site filled in by Date

Copyright  August, 2005, DD+DIS232.05E Agfa-Gevaert AG
All rights reserved
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Technical modifications reserved
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany

DD+DIS071.04E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12
List of contents
1 Glossary ................................................................. 1

1 CR 25.0 Glossary
µGy Micro Gray – x-ray dose

1Gy= 0.87 x 10 –2 J/kg
A / D Converter Analog Digital Converter; the part that translates an
analog signal into a digital signal, which can be
handled by computers.
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center
Adjustloop Service Program for mechanical adjustments of the
CHM-module
step by step cycle of a 3.5x43cm IP + Cassette, to
define the correct stepper motor steps
controlled by the Service PC
AE – title Application Entity
AOS Adonis Operating System
Operating system for Agfa CPU's (Gemini, Goliath,
David)
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol
AUI Attachment Unit Interface (External „Box“ to connect
to a network)
AS Archive Station
BOL Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan
surface along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the
laser beam before it reaches the image plate. The
Pin diode creates a digital signal, called begin of line
signal. The distance (time) between this signal and
the IP must be adjusted.
BOS Begin Of Scan;
Browser Software that provides an interface to the World
Wide Web
BSP Boot Support Package: boot program for Agfa
CPU's
Calibration Procedure on ADC to make a homogeneous
exposure look like one on film. Algorithm to
counterbalance irregularities in the scanner of ADC.
CCM Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to
edit the configuration file adc.cpf)
CHM Cassette Handling Module
Collimation Determination of the region in the image where the
interesting data is at. On that region the image
processing is applied..

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS071.04E
Controller Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The

controller is responsible for the image reception
from the diagnostic equipment, the image
processing, layout of the images on the film, and
image transmission to the machine.
cPCI compact Peripheral Component Interconnect – bus
system used in CR 75.0
CPF – file Customization Parameter File; file that contains
settings for all parameters that can be modified to
configure an ADC System according to local needs.
CPU Central Processing Unit.
CR Computed Radiography
CRUS CR User Station
CU-Filter Copper Filter, used for control of image quality
DAC Digital Analog Converter
Decomposition The original image is being split up in a set of
bandpass-filtered images
Diagnostic Logger Tool on ADC to keep a lot of reduced images with
the corresponding image data on the HD.
DICOM Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine;
Dose, x-ray dose = kV x mA x sec see also µGy = Micro Gray

Dosimeter Device to measure x-ray dose
DR Direct Radiography
DRA Direct Remote Access (external product name:
AGFATEC LINK)
Dynamic Range Exposure range in which ADC can get usable image
data.
Ethernet A network standard for the hardware and data link
levels.
FOI Fiber Optic Interface.
Digital interface for the transmission of image and
control data via a light-leading fiber.
FSE Field Service Engineer
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
The Internet service that transfers files from one
computer to another. (Program used for
transmission of files in the Internet)
Grid to reduce scattered radiation
to increase sharpness
Chapter12 / 2 CR 25.0 Edition 1, Revision 0

GSC Global Support Center

GUI Graphical User Interface
HT power supply High Tension power supply
HCP Hard Copy Printer
HDD Hard Disk Drive
Heel Effect inhomogeneous exposure
HiRes High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer
HIS Hospital Information System
Histogram graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
HUB (Ethernet) box to interconnect network hosts with Twisted Pair
cable. Also called concentrator.
HUB (in AGFA Switchbox (Hard- or Software) which switches or
devices) multiplexes different channels, e.g. AMDI and
Service Channel.
I/O BUS Input / Output BUS.
System consisting of a defined cable, cable
connection, and signal for the parallel transmission
of control data. The machine uses a bus system of 8
V level and 26 parallel lines.
ID Station IDENTIFICATION Station
IMOS IMAGE MONITOR SOFTWARE -Æ succession for
SMA
Internet The global computer network, composed of
thousands of Wide Area Networks (WANs) and
Local Area Networks (LANs), that uses TCP/IP to
provide world-wide communication to homes,
schools, businesses, and governments. The World
Wide Web runs on the Internet.
IP for ADC: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP Image Processing
IP (Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides
data into packets for transmission over the Internet.
Computers must run IP to communicate across the
Internet. See also TCP.
IP-Address (Internet Protocol Address) The standard method
which identifies an internet connected computer.

Java A general-purpose programming language created

by Sun Microsystems. Java can be used to create
Java applets. A Java program is downloaded from
the Web server and interpreted by a program
running on the machine containing the Web
browser.
Java applet A short program written in Java that is attached to a
World Wide Web page and executed by the browser
machine.
JavaScript A cross-platform, World Wide Web scripting
language developed by Netscape Communications.
JavaScript code is inserted directly into the HTML
page.
LAN Local Area Network. Network technology, designed
to connect computers over short distances. It is
possible to connect the LAN with the Internet or to
make a configuration into an intranet.
Laser Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of
Radiation:
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light
Leeds Phantom Image Plate to check the technical image quality of
the ADC. The Leeds Phantom was developed for
Agfa by the University of Leeds.
Low Pass Filtering Butterworth filter in SAB – board to eliminate
frequencies > 250 kHz.
LUT Look Up Table
MD – Plate AGFA MD Æ Medium Definition Image Plate
MFA Machine Factor A
Machine specific value indicating the photo
multiplier sensitivity
MFA is the log of the PM high voltage which results
in a scan average level SAL1800 at a given dose of
1mR (~20 µGy) and a speed class 200
MFB Machine Factor B
MIMOSA Medical IMage Operating System Agfa; Agfa's
workstation operating software
MODEM MODULATOR DEMODULATOR – device to
connect via telephone line to another computer.
Monitor – level lowest software level on CPU (like BIOS on DOS
systems)
stored on EEPROM

mR milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose

1 mR corres. 8.7 µGy
MS-Board Multy Supply Board; is part of the Power Unit,
detects supply voltage, controls the mechanical
periphery of the digitizer and protects the stepper
motor boards.
MUSICA MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification; Agfa's
image processing software
Network location In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet
server. A network location has two or more parts,
separated by periods, as in my.network.location.
Also called host name and Internet address.
Node Nodes in the I/O bus system = printed circuit board
in the I/O bus.
Nullmodem RS 232 (RS242) cable with crossed Transmit /
Receive Line
NVE Name value file editor; editor system for parameter
OLUT Output Look-Up Table
OS Operating System
Password A text string that allows a user access to an Internet
service, if the service requires it.
Photomultiplier Tube Photo Multiplier Tube: opto – electronical sensitive
(PMT) device to convert light (laser emission) in current
and with a I / V –Converter into voltage
Pixel Scanning point on the film or plate. A maximum of
2048 per line may be read by the Photomultiplier.
Preview Monitor displays the image and the name of the patient.
This monitor enables to roughly check whether the
exposure was successful.
PRID PREVIEW and ID Station, installed on one PC
PS Processing Station
Pyramidal Image Image file format of images on VIPS
Quantisation compression of image files
RAM Random Access Memory
volatile main memory of computers
RAM – DISK virtual harddisk simulated in the CPU main memory
Gemini RAM-Disk contains all the machine
dependent parameters, e.g. stepper motor steps,
info counters
REM Tool Debugging tool for AOS logfiles

Reset Machine reset into a defined machine status.

Various checking routines are carried out during a
reset.
RIS Radiology Information System
ROI Region Of Interest
ROM Read Only Memory
RS232 interface Serial interface which converts computer internal
parallel information into serial bits, and vice versa.
SAL Scan Average Level
Digitized photo multiplier signal of an average of
several hundred scanned lines
Range SAL0 – SAL4095 (12bit)
SCP SOFTCOPY Tool
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface – interface to
connect peripherals to computers (e.g. HDD, CD-
ROM)
Server A computer that shares its resources, such as
printers and files, with other computers on the
network.
Service Host
Service interface RS232 standard interface for the connection of the
Service PC.
Shading Calibration position dependent sensitivity calibration; calibration
of each pixel in a line
Shell User Interface of the VME – AOS
Slowscan direction Transport Direction of Image Plate through the scan
unit. The stepper motor speed is calculated such
that the distance between two scan lines equals the
distance between two pixels in a line.
Speed Class (SC) Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base
A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is
exposed with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1
above fog+base.
Square Root Signal ∼ N.
Compression
Method to quantisize Signal in 12 similar block sizes
Standard Res Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer
Subnet number A part of the internet address which designates a
subnet

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking

software that controls the transmission of packets of
data over the Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks
for lost packets, puts the data from multiple packets
into the correct order, and requests that missing or
damaged packets be resent. Computers must run
TCP to communicate with World Wide Web servers.
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Common Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet
Testsheet Image plate with testpattern, print to check the
geometric qualtity of ADC:
Text Field Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and
image processing information
UI User Interface; part of a computer program that
handles interaction with the user.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
URL Uniform Resource Locator; address code for
multimedia documents.
UTP - cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium)
cable. Cable to connect to a computer network.
VIPS Viewing and Image Processing Station
VME bus Versa Module Europe bus Bus system from
Motorola (used in ADC Digitizers)
Bus for the parallel image data transmission. 16 bit
bus.
W/L Window and Leveling of digital images.
X-Rite densitometer Automatic density measuring instrument
manufactured by X-Rite.
2 Key Word Index
A key word index is in preparation.

CR 25.0
Order Number:
DD+DIS071.04E
1st Edition Type 5156 / 100
CR 25.0
Order Number:
DD+DIS071.04E
CR 25.0
Order Number:
DD+DIS071.04E
CR 25.0
Order Number:
DD+DIS071.04E

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



CR 25.0 - Service Manual For Download

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR 25.0 - Service Manual For Download

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE Technical

Global Services Organisation

To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be

Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified

The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed

AGFA-GEVAERT AG - HE/IMG-GSO / Information & Projects

printed in Germany 08 / 2004

2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time

3. Repair and Service

4. Reference and Circuit

5. Spare Parts List

8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27

23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27

25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28

26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Icon Name and Circumstances

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.2 System Labels

Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT

Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye